Bizerba Tare Machine Manual PDF

Retail scale BC II
Basic Class II
Operating instructions
from program version 3.00
6.111.98.5.01.18 en
Alle Rechte vorbehalten
All rights reserved
Tous droits réservés
Reservados todos los derechos
Tutti i diritti riservati
© 04 / 2013
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG,
72336 Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64
72301 Balingen/Germany,
Tel. (+49 7433) 12-0, Fax (+49 7433) 12-2696
e-mail: marketing@bizerba.com
Internet: http://www.bizerba.com
Translation of original operating instructions 6.111.98.5.01.18

Chapter index
About these instructions 1
About the device 2
Safety instructions 3
Installation 4
Device and operating controls 5
Operation 6
Programming 7
Troubleshooting 8
Maintenance 9
Technical data 10
Subject index 11
6.111.98.5.01.18
6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II List of contents
List of contents Page
1 About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

1.1 Safe-keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1.2 Target group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1.3 Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2
1.4 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 3
2 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.1 Device types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.2 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.3 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.4 Designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
2.5 Verification information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3
2.6 Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
2.7 Operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 5
2.7.1 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.8 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
3 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.1 Requirements on the operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.2 Device signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.3 Sources of risk related to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.1 Transport and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2 Installation and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2.1 Conditions for the place of installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2.2 Assemble the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.2.3 Leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2
4.2.4 Check the electric connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
Installation of customer's power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3
4.2.5 Cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Example of scale network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
4.2.6 Rechargeable battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Operation with rechargeable batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
Battery icon display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
6.111.98.5.01.18 0-1
List of contents Operating instruction BC II
Page
4.3 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
4.3.1 Switch on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
4.4 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
5 Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

5.1 Main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
5.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
5.2.1 Display icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2
5.3 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.3.1 Membrane keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3
5.3.2 Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.3.3 Key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
5.3.4 Keyboard options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
5.4 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
5.4.1 Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
5.4.2 Opening and closing the thermal print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
5.4.3 Ticket roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Insert new ticket roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
5.4.4 Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
6 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.1 Switching on device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.2 Switch off device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.3 Zerosetting device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.4 Operating options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.4.1 Multiple-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2
6.4.2 Self-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
6.4.3 Quick-service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4
6.4.4 Price labeling with manual triggering * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6
6.4.5 Price labeling with automatic start * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
6.4.6 Piece price multi- label printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
6.4.7 Fixed weight label multi-printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
6.5 Unit price input via 10-key keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
6.5.1 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . 6 - 10
6.6 Cancellation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
6.7 Scroll function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
6.8 Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
6.9 Subtotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
6.10 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
0-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Page
6.11 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15

6.11.1 Calling up PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
6.11.2 Operator sales with PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
”Overwrite” PLU unit price”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces 6 - 17
Register manual weight input ( depending on country) . . . . . . . . . 6 - 18
6.12 Tare functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19
6.12.1 Tare balancing for unknown tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19
Unknown tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19
Batch tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20
6.12.2 Tare balancing for known tare values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 21
Manual tare (country-related) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 21
PLU tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 22
6.12.3 Operator tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23
Save tare value weighed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23
Save tare value entered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23
Call up operator tare saved . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24
6.13 Assisted sales with ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
6.14 Talon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26
6.15 Print ticket upon request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26
6.16 Repeat ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27
6.17 Open ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27
6.17.1 Open the last ticket via the operator key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28
6.17.2 Open the ticket via ticket number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 28
6.17.3 Overwrite VAT from PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29
6.18 Serviced selling with label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30
6.19 By Count article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 31
6.20 Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 36
6.21 By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40
6.22 Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
6.23 Product with data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46
6.23.1 Sale with manual input of the traceability number . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 46
6.23.2 Sale with fixed traceability number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 47
7 Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.1 Initial display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.2 Menu password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.3 Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
6.111.98.5.01.18 0-3
Page
General programming sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

7.4 Initial scale setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 4
7.5 Overview of list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
7.5.1 PLU article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
7.5.2 Header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 5
7.5.3 Additional texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
7.5.4 Scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 6
7.5.5 PLU direct keys .................................. 7 - 6
7.5.6 Barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
7.5.7 BLD labels ........................................ 7 - 7
7.5.8 Logos ............................................... 7 - 8
7.5.9 VAT rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 9
7.6 General procedure for text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
7.7 Overview of scrolling messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 15
7.8 Barcode overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 16
Manufacturer code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 18
Manufacturer code EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 19
Instore code EAN 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 20
Instore code EAN 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 25
Code 128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 26
7.9 Traceability marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 32
7.10 Overview of By Count article definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 33
Create By Count piece goods in a PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 34
7.11 Create overview of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 35
7.12 Overview of By Count fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 36
7.13 Overview VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 37
7.13.1 Assign VAT to PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 38
7.14 Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00) . . . 7 - 39
0-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Page
7.15 Article maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 42

7.15.1 Defining PLU (article) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110 . 7 - 43
Unit price input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44
Product group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44
Tare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 44
Sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 45
Barcode for article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 45
Overwriting the price . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46
Article type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 46
Weight class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 47
Data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 47
PLU article text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 47
Supplementary text 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 48
Supplementary text 1-10 for BLD text fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 48
Logo print in BLD logo fields ............................. 7 - 49
By Count: Pieces per package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 49
Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight . . . . . . 7 - 50
By-Count: Mandatory input of pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 50
By-Count: Fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 50
By-Count: Fixed weight mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 50
Mandatory input of fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
VAT number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Overwriteable VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 51
Tare % (dependent on country) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 52
7.15.2 Print PLU (article) lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr115 . 7 - 53
7.15.3 Deleting PLU (article) individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 120 . 7 - 54
7.15.4 Deleting PLU (article) from - to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 121 . 7 - 54
7.16 Data management Menu Pr 2-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 55
7.16.1 Creating supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200 . 7 - 55
7.16.2 Creating header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201 . 7 - 56
7.16.3 Defining scrolling message text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 202 . 7 - 57
7.16.4 Printing texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 205 . 7 - 58
7.16.5 Deleting supplementary texts and header/footer texts . Pr 206 . 7 - 59
Deleting supplementary text individually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Deleting all supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Deleting header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 59
Deleting scrolling message texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 60
7.16.6 Defining barcode structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 210 . 7 - 61
Defining barcode format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 61
Entering a code constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62
Selecting numeric codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 62
Checking and adopting code structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 64
7.16.7 Administering barcode structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211 . 7 - 65
6.111.98.5.01.18 0-5
Page
7.16.8 Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 . 7 - 67

Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU) . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 68
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece) . . . 7 - 68
Barcode for non-PLU minus article . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 68
Barcode for total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 68
Product groups for non-PLU weighed products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed products
(sold by piece) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 69
VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods) . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
VAT for Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
PLU number for non-PLU articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 70
7.16.9 Printing BLD label list / logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 220 . 7 - 71
Printing BLD label list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 71
Printing logo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 71
7.16.10 Deleting BLD labels / logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 225 . 7 - 71
Deleting BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 72
Deleting BLD logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 72
7.16.11 Defining VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 230 . 7 - 72
Defining VAT rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 73
VAT inclusive or exclusive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 73
VAT text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 73
7.16.12 Managing VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231 . 7 - 74
Printing VAT list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 74
Deleting VAT numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 74
Same VAT for all articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 74
7.17 Reports menu Pr 3-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 75
7.17.1 Configuring report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 . 7 - 75
7.17.2 Printing reports on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 310 . 7 - 77
Scales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 77
PLU report with one article text line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 78
PLU report with all article text lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 78
Product group report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 79
Operator report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 80
Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that
contains data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 81
Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that
contain data of origin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 81
VAT sales report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 82
7.17.3 Printing report on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 311 . 7 - 82
7.17.4 Displaying / deleting sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 320 . 7 - 83
Displaying sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 83
Deleting sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 83
Delete journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 83
0-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
Page
7.18 Configuration menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 84

7.18.1 Setting date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr500 . 7 - 84
Setting date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 85
Setting time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 85
Printing year either 2 or 4-digital . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 85
Date representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 86
7.18.2 Setting main operating mode Pr510 . 7 - 87
Selecting main operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 87
Selecting layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 87
Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 88
Select paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 88
7.18.3 Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511 . 7 - 89
Selecting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 89
Selecting layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 89
Addition of customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 90
Select paper type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 90
7.18.4 Settings for different operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr515 . 7 - 90
Automatic zero setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 90
Open tickets / labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 91
Origin labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 91
Defining data of origin number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 91
Negative customer total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 91
Sales calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 92
Mandatory input for By Count pieces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 92
Mandatory input for fixed weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 92
7.18.5 Scrolling message settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 516 . 7 - 93
Selecting scrolling message no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 93
Selecting display location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 93
Activating scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 93
Testing scrolling message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 94
7.18.6 Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520 . 7 - 94
Constant key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 94
Printing article and total label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 95
Items operator display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 96
Cash register functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 96
Amount tend./change operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 97
Talon printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 97
Repeating ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 98
Opening ticket again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 98
Printing cancellation and canceled articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 99
Printing included VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 99
Ticket printout, as required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 99
7.18.7 Settings for quick service mode Pr 521 . 7 - 100
7.18.8 Settings for price labeling mode * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr525 . 7 - 101
Labeling mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 101
Multiple label printing for price per piece . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 102
7.18.9 Allocating operator no. to operator keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 530 . 7 - 103
6.111.98.5.01.18 0-7
Page
7.18.10 PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535 . 7 - 103

10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 103
PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad . . . . . . 7 - 104
PLU direct key mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 104
PLU direct key allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 104
PLU range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 105
Delay time PLU no. input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 106
7.18.11 Printing PLU direct keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr536 . 7 - 107
7.18.12 Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540 . 7 - 108
7.18.13 Rounding and price calculation settings for
national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 545 . 7 - 108
Rounding methods for customer total * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 109
Rounding of article total * .............................. 7 - 109
Rounding for By count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 110
7.19 Ticket design overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 111
7.19.1 Creating ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 550 . 7 - 112
Printing barcode on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 112
Barcode height in mm on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 112
Printing tare on ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 113
Printing header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 113
Printing footer text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 113
Printing foreign currency supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 114
Printing rounding supplementary text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 114
Font change on tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 115
Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket . . . . . . . 7 - 115
Ticket counter printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 115
Printing foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 116
Printing amount paid in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 116
Printing supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 116
Printing header logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 117
Printing footer logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 117
0-8 6.111.98.5.01.18
Page
7.20 Label design - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 118

BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 119
7.20.1 Designing labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 555 . 7 - 120
Label type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 121
Selecting BLD labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 122
Label size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 122
Changing label distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 122
Packed-on and sell-by date on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 122
Barcode on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 123
Barcode height in mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 123
Tara printout on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 123
Printing header text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 124
Alternative text with sell-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 124
Logo printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 124
Beginning of text field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 125
Start of data field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 125
Data field monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 126
Font change on tickets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 127
Printing price frame and texts on label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 127
Printing operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label . . . . . 7 - 127
Printing foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 128
180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only) . . . . . . 7 - 128
Alternative text for packed-on date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 130
Alternative text for use-by date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 130
Printing units on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 130
Printing speed for label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 130
7.20.2 Labels configuration management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 556 . 7 - 131
Saving configuration from Pr 555 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 131
Selecting label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 132
Deleting label configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 132
7.20.3 Foreign currency settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 560 . 7 - 133
Selecting foreign currency function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 133
Selecting foreign/ second currency display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 133
Foreign currency calculation method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 134
Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 134
Foreign currency symbol on label for price field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 134
Decimal places in foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 134
Foreign currency factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 135
Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 135
Rounding of foreign currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 135
Foreign currency translation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 136
7.20.4 Ticket call-up data volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 570 . 7 - 136
6.111.98.5.01.18 0-9
Page
7.21 Commissioning menu Pr 6-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 137

7.21.1 TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 600 . 7 - 137
DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 138
Display of scale current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 138
IP: IP address if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 138
Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 138
Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 138
DNS1: Address of domain name server 1,
if no DHCP selected .................................... 7 - 139
DNS2: Address of domain name server 2,
if no DHCP selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 139
Host name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 139
Leasing address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 139
7.21.2 Display current IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr601 . 7 - 140
7.21.3 Printout of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602 . 7 - 140
7.21.4 Setting scale number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 603 . 7 - 140
7.21.5 Setting department number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 604 . 7 - 141
7.21.6 Setting machine ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 605 . 7 - 142
7.21.7 Commissioning (memory management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 606 . 7 - 142
No. of PLUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 144
Number of supplementary texts per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 144
Number of BLD text fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 144
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 144
Number of supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 144
Number of items (ticket memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 145
By count, fixed weight, VAT and tare % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 145
Decimal places* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 145
Using expanded RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 146
Journal function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 146
Starting database configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 147
7.21.8 Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . Pr 607 . 7 - 148
Scale type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 148
Multicast IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 149
Multicast port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 149
UDP port number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 149
7.21.9 Controlling display lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 610 . 7 - 150
7.21.10 Setting turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 615 . 7 - 151
7.21.11 WLAN settings Pr 621 . 7 - 151
Activating WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 152
Time slices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 152
Ping on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 153
IP address of WLAN module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 153
Test telegram on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 154
IP address of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 154
Port number of telegram recipient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 154
7.21.12 Beeper on/off Pr 622 . 7 - 154
7.21.13 Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 625 . 7 - 155
7.21.14 Changing key functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 630 . 7 - 156
0 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.18
Page
7.21.15 Keyboard selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr631 . 7 - 158

7.21.16 RAM clearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 666 . 7 - 159
7.21.17 Entering password for menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 690 . 7 - 159
7.21.18 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting . . . . . . . Pr 695 . 7 - 160
Changing main currency to second currency (Euro) . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 160
Converting PLU price into EURO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 160
7.22 Service menu Pr 7-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 161
7.22.1 Test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700 . 7 - 161
7.22.2 Printing boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701 . 7 - 162
7.22.3 Printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr702 . 7 - 163
7.22.4 Printing menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703 . 7 - 163
7.22.5 Printing weighing system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 704 . 7 - 164
7.22.6 Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710 . 7 - 165
Feed for labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 165
Moving print format on the label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 165
Correcting ticket feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 166
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 166
Changing print intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 166
7.22.7 Displaying ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712 . 7 - 167
7.22.8 Displaying load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715 . 7 - 167
7.22.9 Displaying program version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 716 . 7 - 168
Main program version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Bootloader version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Option resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Layout resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Menu resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Text resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Keyboard resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Font resource version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
Software version number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 168
7.22.10 Displaying battery voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 717 . 7 - 169
7.22.11 Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718 . 7 - 170
7.22.12 Logbook control Pr 730 . 7 - 171
7.23 Programming overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 174
6.111.98.5.01.18 0 - 11
Page
8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
8.1 Fault description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
8.2 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2
9 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
9.1 Cleaning ................................................. 9 - 1
9.1.1 Cleaning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
9.1.2 Cleaning the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
9.1.3 Cleaning products for printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
9.2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
9.2.1 Testing the weight display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
9.2.2 Note on storing thermal paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
9.2.3 Ticket, label and Linerless rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6
10 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
10.1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
10.2 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
10.3 Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Threshold values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
Subject index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Appendix
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
0 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II About these instructions
1
1 About these instructions
Read through the operating manual carefully before connecting and switching on the
device to ensure that you fully utilize the quality and possibilities of application this device
offers.
This operating manual explains how to operate and set the device.
It also includes functions that are only required by Bizerba Service. Contact your Bizerba
technical consultant if necessary.
Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific
regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the instructions may differ from the supplied
version.
1.1 Safe-keeping
This operating manual is an integral part of the device and must be kept next to it, easily
accessible for all personnel.
If the device is resold, the complete operating manual must be provided with it.
1.2 Target group

The device may only be operated by trained personnel. This means that the operator must
be familiar with the contents of this operating manual.
Installation, servicing and repairs may only be performed by qualified personnel authorized
by Bizerba.
6.111.98.5.01.18 1-1
About these instructions Operating instruction BC II
1
1.3 Symbols used
Various symbols are used in these instructions.
Symbol Meaning
Text with arrow prompts you to carry out an action.
Mod Key symbols prompt you to press this key on
+ Key symbols with a + prompt you to keep the 1st key held down while
you press the second key.
1 Position numbers in figures.
<Key> Text within < > describes a key.
”Display” Text within ” ” indicates the display text.
Notes
_______________________________________________________________________
Observance of these notes is mandatory.
_______________________________________________________________________
Information
_______________________________________________________________________
This information is provided for greater understanding.
_______________________________________________________________________
Menu settings
Prerequisites and menu settings for functions or rules are highlighted in gray.
Menu settings are the prerequisites for descriptions or operation procedures.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted
Syntax: Pr 110/ 06 -1
Pr 110 Program number “110”
/ 06 Submenu “06”
-1 Setting “1”
1-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II About these instructions
1
1.4 Warnings
Warnings are divided into danger levels by the signal word.
Signal word
Symbol Meaning
_______________________________________________________________________
DANGER Source of danger with high risk with imminent danger for
personnel!
The consequences are:
- critical injuries
- severe damage to health
Measures to avoid the danger are specified.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING Source of danger with medium risk with potentially threatening
danger for personnel!
The consequences can be:
- serious injuries
- damage to health
- serious damage to property
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION Source of danger with low risk with potentially threatening
danger for personnel!
The consequences can be:
- Injuries
- Damage to property
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION Source of danger, improper use!
Damage to property can result.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 1-3
About these instructions Operating instruction BC II
1
1-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II About the device
2 Device
2
2.1 Device types
The BC II device type is available with either a thermal ticket printer or a label printer.
T = Thermal ticket printer
E = Label printer
BC II 800 T
BC II 800 E
Fig. 1: BC II 800
BC II 100 T
BC II 100 E
Fig. 2: BC II 100
BC II 200 T
BC II 200 E
Fig. 3: BC II 200
2.2 Accessories
We offer a comprehensive accessories program for the device. Please contact your
Bizerba technical consultant for further information.
2.3 Intended use
The BC II scale is particularly suitable for counter sales, quick and self-service, as well as
manual price labeling and simple cash reg. (POS) functions. Use devices only for intended
use.
6.111.98.5.01.18 2-1
About the device Operating instruction BC II
2.4 Designation label

2 Designation label of a verified scale.
Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels:
Explanations of the individual labels:

11147xxxxx Designation label no.
CE 13 CE certification with the last two digits of the year in which the
CE certification was applied.
0103 Identification number of the appointed body ”Verification Ma‐
nagement - Stuttgart”
D07-09-014 No. of EC type approval
green square symbol (sign for EC-first verification)
M
BIZERBA Manufacturer
BCII Type designation (basic type)
Nr./No. Device No.
Max 6 kg Maximum load Max
Min 20 g Minimum load Min
e=2g Verification value , e
T= - 6 kg Subtractive tare maximum load T= -
120-240V 0.35-0.25A Electrical data
50/60Hz
Scale accuracy class III
Device must not be disposed of in domestic waste. Return to

the manufacturer or dealer Note the statutory regulations in
your country
2-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
2.5 Verification information

Verification information for EC countries
2
The green M (sign for EC-first verification) is on the designation label of the scale. This
type of scale can be put into operation and used on site provided that it is not connected to
an additional device, e.g. cash register or printer.
Scales that are connected on site to an additional device (e.g. cash register or printer)
must have their first verification carried out either by the responsible verification office or
by a verification officer from Bizerba. Scales as well as the additional device (e.g. cash
register) must be tested and verified. If the scale fulfills the verification specifications with
their additional device, it can be used in legal for trade applications. In the case of
extensions at a later date, once the scale has already been put into operation, the relevant
verification office must be informed.
Scales and additional devices without the CE mark may not be used in legal for trade
operations.
Scales that are verified to a specific verification zone (acceleration of fall) (details are
given on the designation label) may not be used in other verification zones without being
reverified.
According to statutory regulations, the user of a scale must ensure that it is used for its
intended purpose. This includes observation of the verification guidelines, in particular
amendments, supplements and additions.
Reverification information
Reverification of scales is executed according to the respective statutory country
regulations. The verification validity period in Germany for example, for scales is usually 2
years. Price labeling scales have a verification validity period of 1 year. The verification
validity period begins when the scales are put into circulation (installation and
commissioning). Please refer here to the designation label (in the present example, 2007,
as the designation is CE 07).
Verification information for non-EU countries

The statutory regulations of the specific countries must be observed.
_______________________________________________________________________
A yellow mark of conformity is affixed to the load receptor of the
scale, with the inscription ”Verified by BIZERBA” (first verification by
Bizerba). Reverifications must be carried out by the operator of the
scale according to the legal requirements.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 2-3
2.6 Standards and guidelines

2 The equipment fulfils the following requirements:
Measuring technology
Directive 90/384/EEC scales guidelines ”nonautomatic scales”
OIML R76-Ed. 2006 Organisation internationale de métrologie légale
Nonautomatic weighing instruments
DIN EN 45501 Metrological aspects of nonautomatic scales
OIML R60 Metrological regulation for load cells
WELMEC 2.3 Guideline for software testing
Handbook 44 Specifications, tolerances and other technical require‐
ments for weighing and measuring devices (USA)
Publication 14 Weighing devices, Checklist, Test procedures
(USA)Weights and Measures Act (Canada)
Electromagnetic compatibility
Directive 2004/108/ EC EMC-guideline
DIN EN 61000-6-1/ 2007-10 interference resistance
Residential, commercial and light industry
DIN EN 61000-6-3/ 2007-09 emitted interference
Residential, commercial and light industry
DIN EN 61000-3-2/2006-10 Harmonics current
DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06 Voltage fluctuations and flickers
GB 9254-1998 Information Technology Equipment - Radio Disturbance
Characteristics - Limits and Methods of Measurement
Electrical safety
Directive 2006/ 95 EC Low voltage guideline
IEC 60950-1/ 2001 Information technology equipment - Safety
DIN EN 60950-1/ 2006-11 Information technology equipment - Safety
UL 60950-1/ 2006-07 Information technology equipment - Safety
DIN EN 60529/ 2000-09 Protection types provided by housing (IP code)
2-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
2.7 Operating conditions

Do not install or commission equipment until the operating conditions have been fulfilled. 2
- Temperature and air humidity:

The permitted values and class of protection are found on the designation label on the
device and on page 10 - 2.
- Installation area
A flat, vibration-free position as well as the driest possible installation must be
guaranteed for our equipment.
Vibrations can affect measurements made by the scales.
- Align horizontally
To ensure the precision of the sales, it is of absolute necessity that the device is
aligned horizontally.
- Draft
Drafts can affect the measurements made by the scales.
- Air convection
Free air convection must be able to form around the device in order to avoid
inadmissible heating.
- Supply voltage
The permitted values can be found on the designation label on the device - and
see page 10 - 2.
- Trained personnel:
Only trained personnel can maximize the performance of the device and avoid risks.
- Written consent for modifications:
Modifications to the devices require our prior written consent. External data dialog
between Bizerba equipment and other manufacturers' equipment, the hardware and
software required, test and modification work, must be clarified with us in writing.
Please contact us or our competent customer service points if you have any doubts
regarding the practical application of these conditions.
For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective
manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.
6.111.98.5.01.18 2-5
2.7.1 Power supply

2 The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be
carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived
from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following
commissions:
- International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
- European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)
- Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)
Our units are built to VDE protection class I and must be connected to a protective
conductor.
Interference suppression measures

If the mains power supply is subject to electric interference, interference suppression
measures must be taken on site, e.g.:
- provision of separate mains cable to our equipment.
- in problem cases, insertion of capacitively decoupled isolating transformers or other
suppressors into the mains supply lines to our equipment.
2-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
2.8 Warranty
Installation, commissioning and initial training must be carried out by trained staff from our 2
sales offices and customer service points or by companies authorized by us.
We do not accept any liability for damages resulting from:
- Non-compliance with our operating conditions and operating manual.
- Defective electrical installation by the customer.
- Structural changes to our equipment.
- Removal of verification seals and fuse stamps.
- Incorrect programming and operation.
- Natural wear and tear..
The warranty will lapse if defects/damage occur as a result of interventions by persons we
have not authorized or the use of non-Bizerba genuine spare parts.
If you reset or program devices, check the new setting with a test run and test printout.
This helps to avoid faulty results.
Only trained staff may operate the equipment.
Check that our products are handled correctly and repeat training if necessary.
Our products are subject to constant further development and various country-specific
regulations. Pictorial and graphic examples in the operating manual may differ from the
supplied version.
2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection

_______________________________________________________________________
Only applies to Germany!
_______________________________________________________________________
This device includes batteries which are subject to the Batteries Act concerning return and
disposal of used batteries and accumulators.
This act holds you as the end user responsible to return the device to the manufacturer or
its distributor for the purpose of recycling and proper disposal after the end of its intended
use.
Bizerba and its distributors are ready to except the returns of your old devices which are
no longer operated.
In these instances, please, contact your Bizerba specialist in charge.
If the device includes a chargeable battery pack, according to the Battery Act you are
responsible to return used battery packs to the distributor or to return locations which are
provided to the public.
Of course, Bizerba and its distributors will also accept your used battery packs.
6.111.98.5.01.18 2-7
2
2-8 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Safety instructions
3 Safety instructions
The safety instructions must be observed throughout the installation, operation,
cleaning and maintenance procedures.
3
3.1 Requirements on the operating personnel

The device may only be operated by people who have been instructed in the operating
procedure. The operating personnel must read and understand the safety instructions in
this Operating Manual.
Please pay special attention to and memorize all safety and hazard information!
Carry out regular training!
Operators (purchasers) as well as supervisory and operating staff must carry out
programming and data protection on our systems and equipment exclusively in
accordance with our operating and programming instructions.
Only use equipment for its intended purpose.
3.2 Device signs
Remove the mains plug from the socket
Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket
6.111.98.5.01.18 3-1
Safety instructions Operating instruction BC II
3.3 Sources of risk related to the system

_______________________________________________________________________
3 For safety reasons, shut equipment down immediately in the event of
recurring faults, damage of any type, and suspicion of risk of injury.
Always inform the nearest customer service point.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Check before mains connection
Before connecting the device, check
- the power supply data on the designation label
- the power supply data of the mains supply
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING Incorrect supply voltage !
Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.
- Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power
supply data do not match the connection values of the scale.
The power supply data must be identical.
- Inform Bizerba Customer Service.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION Voltage at switched-off scale!
Even when the scale is switched off, the scale electronics is live.
- Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING Opening the device!
Electric shock.
- The device may only be opened by trained and qualified Bizerba
personnel.
_______________________________________________________________________
3-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Installation
4 Installation
4.1 Transport and storage
Always transport and store the device in the original packaging
4
4.2 Installation and assembly
Installation, first commissioning, adjustment, initial instruction, Maintenance and repair
may only be performed by our customer service and/or by companies or persons
authorized by us.
4.2.1 Conditions for the place of installation

The place of installation must fulfil the following conditions.
- Flat installation surface.
- Freedom from vibrations, oscillations and drafts, as well as the driest possible
installation must be guaranteed for our equipment.
- The equipment must be arranged with respect for operating and work sequence, and
taking account of maintenance aspects.
4.2.2 Assemble the device

Unpacking
Open packaging, remove accessories and lift the device carefully out of the packaging.
6.111.98.5.01.18 4-1
Installation Operating instruction BC II
4.2.3 Leveling
To compensate for any small irregularities in the floor space, the scale can be leveled at
the foot screws using a spirit level.
_______________________________________________________________________
After each change of location, the scale must be re-leveled.
4
_______________________________________________________________________
1 Position the spirit level

2 Foot screws
Fig. 6: BC II 800
2
1
Fig. 7: BC II 100
Turn the foot screws 2 until the air 1

bubble 3 is located in the center of the
spirit level . 1
Fig. 8: Leveling
4-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
4.2.4 Check the electric connection

_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING Incorrect supply voltage!
Destruction of electrical components, risk of fire.
- Do not connect the device to the electric mains if the power 4
supply data do not match the connection values of the scale.
The power supply data must be identical.
- Inform Bizerba Customer Service.
_______________________________________________________________________
Installation of customer's power supply

The installation of the mains power supply for connecting to our equipment must be
carried out in accordance with the international specifications and the regulations derived
from them. These essentially include the recommendations of at least one of the following
commissions:
- International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
- European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC)
- Association of German Electrotechnicians (VDE)
_______________________________________________________________________
Check before mains connection
Before connecting the device, check
- the power supply data on the designation label
- the power supply data of the mains supply
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 4-3
4.2.5 Cable connections

_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION Do not insert or remove the connection cable when the device
is switched on.
4 Interfaces are either defect or misfunctioning.
Always switch off the device before inserting or removing the
connection cable.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Secure the power cable against falling out when strain drops. 4
_______________________________________________________________________
1 EDP (scale network)

2 Cash drawer 1
3 Power cable 2
4 Clip (strain relief)
4 3
Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200
1 EDP (scale network)

2 Cash drawer 2
3 Power cable 1
4 Clip (strain relief)
4
Fig. 10: BC II 800
4-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Example of scale network

Several scales are connected with a switch.
Switch
4
Scale1 1 Scale 2 1 Scale 3 1 Scale 4 1 Scale 5 1 Scale 6 1
1 Connection scale (EDP, scale network)
_______________________________________________________________________
During installation and cabling of systems the Bizerba guideline
“Networks for scales” need to be adhered to.
Ask your Bizerba consultant or Bizerba Service.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 4-5
4.2.6 Rechargeable battery

The BC II devices are available with and without rechargeable batteries.
_______________________________________________________________________
WARNING Replace the rechargeable battery!
4 Risk of explosion if not replaced properly.
- The installation or removal of the battery may only be carried out
by our customer services and/or a company or person assigned
by us.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Charge battery completely before battery operation.
Procedure:
- Connect mains to scale.
- Switch on scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Depending on the use and ambient temperature, with a fully charged battery, the scales
can be operated for 20-25 hours without being connected to the mains.
After only 6-7 hours charging time the battery is completely recharged.
Operation with rechargeable batteries

Rechargeable batteries will run down even during prolonged idle periods if the scale is not
connected to the mains. Therefore, connect the scale to the mains at least every
3months.
If the scales are being powered by the mains, the batteries are recharged when switched on
(conservation charging).
_______________________________________________________________________
If the scales are operated at an ambient temperature below 0_C, the
battery cannot be recharged.
_______________________________________________________________________
Overloading the batteries is prevented automatically by an integrated charging circuit. This
charging circuit also prevents any damaging total discharge. The battery lifetime reduces if
it is permanently operated at an almost discharged state.
_______________________________________________________________________
When being operated by battery, the printer prints at a slower speed.
Due to this intentional reduced printing speed, the scales can be
operated for a longer period when not connected to the mains power
supply.
_______________________________________________________________________
4-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
Battery icon display
4
kg EURO per EUR
Fig. 11: Display

1 Battery icon
When connected to the mains:

--- Battery icon not visible.
Scales is connected to the mains.
The batteries are charged.
Arrow flashes slowly
Battery is being charged.
Arrow flashes very fast
The temperature of the battery is less than 0€C. A statement as to the charged
state of the battery cannot be made.
When battery operated:

Arrow flashes permanently
The charging of the battery is OK.
Arrow flashes fast
Warning, batteries require charging.
Depending on the age of the battery and the ambient temperature, it is possible to
continue operations for about 60 minutes.
Arrow flashes very fast. In addition, a permanent tone occurs for approx. 10 sec.
The battery is empty. The device is switched off after 10 seconds.
6.111.98.5.01.18 4-7
4.3 Commissioning
Commissioning, as well as instruction on the operation, cleaning, maintenance and
servicing is carried out by the relevant Bizerba customer services office or the Bizerba
trade consultant.
4
4.3.1 Switch on device
Prerequisite
- The device has been installed properly and connected to the mains power supply.
- The scale should not be loaded.
Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1.
4.4 Decommissioning
If you wish to decommission the scale for a prolonged period of time,
- Switch the scale off.
- Remove the AC power plug and detach all cable connections.
- Clean the scale in accordance with the cleaning instructions.
4-8 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Device and operating controls
5 Device and operating controls
5.1 Main switch
5
Fig. 12: BC II
1 Main switch on BC II 800
2 Main switch on BC II 100 and 200
6.111.98.5.01.18 5-1
Device and operating controls Operating instruction BC II
5.2 Display
1
2
3
5
kg EURO per EUR
7 6 5
Fig. 13: Dot 7 display

The display is divided into:
1 Dot Matrix (20x208 Dots)
2 Lit icons
3 Symbols printed on the glass panel (dependent on country)
4 Light symbol for system identification
5 Selling price
6 Unit price
7 Weight value
5.2.1 Display icons

Type- and country-dependent icons designate different operating states.
The printed icons are marked by arrows that light up.
= Net display after taring process
= Prepack
= Battery operation/battery charging control,
= Unit price per kg
= Unit price per 100g
= Fixed unit price
= Constant unit price
= Operator number after registration
= Character for display of total
I = Symbol for single division scale
II = Symbol for dual division scale
= Symbol for fixed weight for dot 7 display
= Symbol for fixed weight for 7 segment display
5-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
5.3 Keyboard
_______________________________________________________________________
Keyboard designs are country-dependent.
_______________________________________________________________________
5
5.3.1 Membrane keyboard
There are two transparent modules on the membrane keyboard into which insert-foils can
be inserted if required.
1 Insert-foil 30 keys DEU 4

(Country ID, e.g. DEU defines keyboard 3
labeling)
2 Insert-foil 54 keys DEU
2
3 Membrane keyboard 54 keys
4 Membrane keyboard 30 keys
Fig. 14: Example of insert-foils

Example:
Fig. 15: Insert foil with 54 key
Fig. 16: Insert foil with 30 keys.
6.111.98.5.01.18 5-3
5.3.2 Keyboard
1 Keyboard 84 keys 1
5
Fig. 17: Keyboard
5.3.3 Key functions
Fig. 18: Example of keyboard
5-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Key Function
Tab
1 - 54 <PLU 1> to <PLU 54>
PLU = Price Look Up (product plus price, text, etc. is displayed)
A Z
19 - 15 Non-numeric and special characters <A< to <Z> (function only in menu)
1 - Operator 1 <OP1> to Operator 4 <OP4> 5

<Paper feed>
- <Minus input>
) ]
0 <Reset>
T1 <Fixed tare T1>
T1 - T4 <Fixed tare T1> to <Fixed tare T4>
<Scroll>
St <Cancellation>
A <Cancellation> (country-specific version)
Void <Cancellation> (country-specific version)
Mod <Mod>
Esc <Escape>
<Multiplication>
<Switch> / <Overwrite>
PLU
Man <Switch> / <Overwrite> (country-specific version)
6.111.98.5.01.18 5-5
Key Function
<Non-weighed>
<Constant>
F <Constant> (country-specific version)

5
Pre-
pack <Constant> (country-specific version)
<Tare>
Tare <Tare> (country-specific version)
Ctrl <Control>
<Enter>
En-
ter <Enter> (country-specific version)
<Shift>
<Clear> (delete)
Clr <Clear> (delete)
<Subtotal>
<Total>
<Print> (country-specific version)
5-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
5.3.4 Keyboard options
Menu setting
- Pr631 - 00 to 03 keyboard selection, see page 7 - 158
Additional frame with 24 keys

5
Additional frame for 24 PLUs.
The additional frame is attached to the basic keyboard.
1 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 7 8 9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16 17 18
19 20 21 22 23 24
Fig. 19: Additional 24PLU frame

1 Additional frame
2 Write-on insert
Front-foil with 30 keys

Front-foil with 30 PLU keys.
The front-foil is placed over the top of the basic keyboard.
Fig. 20: Front foil 30 PLU

1 Front membrane
2 Write-on insert
6.111.98.5.01.18 5-7
5.4 Printer
Models BC II 100 to BC II 800 are equipped with label printer. The printers operate
according to the thermal printing principle. The paper can only be printed on the thermal
side.
5.4.1 Printer and side cover for BC II 100/200

5
Printer lid BC II 100/200
3
open
The printer lid 2 is marked on the top with
arrows 3 .
Hold the printer lid at the positions
marked by the 3 arrows.
Open the printer lid by pulling it
downwards.
Fig. 21: Printer lid BC II 100/200

close
Fold the printer lid upwards.
Side cover BC II 100/ 200
Open
Hold the side cover 1 at the fluted grip.
Open the side cover pulling it
downwards.
close
1
Close the side cover by pulling it
upwards.
1
Fig. 22: Side cover BC II 100/ 200
5-8 6.111.98.5.01.18
Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800
Side cover BC II 800

Open
Hold the slide cover at the 1 grips. 1
Open the side cover pulling it 5
downwards.
close
Close the side cover by pulling it
upwards.
Fig. 23: Side cover BC II 800

Printer lid
The printer lid is 2 marked at the bottom with
arrows 3 .
Open
2
Take hold of the printer lid 2 at the
places marked with the arrows. 3
Open the printer lid by pulling it upwards.
Fig. 24: BC II 800 Open printer lid
close 2
Fold the printer lid down 2 .
Fig. 25: BC II 800 Close printer lid
6.111.98.5.01.18 5-9
5.4.2 Opening and closing the thermal print head

BC II 100/200
2
open
Place one finger underneath the red grip
element 1 .
5
Pull the grip element 1 towards you until
the thermal print head disengages and
folds down. 2
1
close
Fig. 26: Label printer in BC II 100
Place your finger on the red grip element
1 .
Press the thermal print head 2 upwards

against the printer roller and then
backwards until the thermal print head
engages.
BC 800
open
1
Place your index finger underneath the
red grip element. 1 .
Push the grip element 1 upwards until
the thermal print head disengages. 2
Fold the thermal print head upwards. 2
Fig. 27: Opening the thermal print head
close
Place your thumb on the red grip
element.
Push the thermal print head backwards
against the printer roller and then
downwards until the thermal print head
engages.
Fig. 28: Closing the thermal print head
5 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.18
5.4.3 Ticket roll

Run out of ticket paper
The paper end is indicated by a red mark on the paper. When this mark appears, insert a
new ticket roll.
Paper feed for label printer with ticket paper

5
1 take-up arbor
2 ticket roll
3 deflection roller with red adjustable ring
1
4 thermal print head
5 printer roller
2
Insert new ticket roll
Open the side cover and printer cover, 5

see page 5 - 9.
4
Open the thermal print head, see page 3
5 - 10.
Remove the empty core of the ticket roll. Abb. 29: Paper feed for ticket paper /
BC II 800
Insert a new ticket roll 2 .

Feed the ticket paper around the 1
take-up arbor 1 and the deflection bolt 2
3 as shown in the figure. Insert paper
until the paper edge protrudes the
thermal print head 4 by approx. 80mm.
3
Abb. 30: Paper feed ticket paper /

BC II 800
Close the thermal print head, see page 5 - 10.

Open the side cover and printer cover, see page 5 - 9.
6.111.98.5.01.18 5 - 11
5.4.4 Label
End of label
After printing the last label, insert a new label roll.
1
Insert label roll 3
Open the side cover and printer lid, see
5 page 5 - 8.
Open the thermal print head,
see page 5 - 10.
Remove the label roll from the take-up
pin. 3 .
Pull the red peel-off unit 6 outwards.
4
Pull the backing paper off the take-up 5
pin. 1
Pull 5 labels off the backing paper of the
new label roll.
Place the new label roll 4 on the
take-up pin. 3 . 2
Insert the backing paper in accordance 6

with the direction of the paper and attach
it to the take-up pin. 1 .
The Backing paper must be positioned
on collar. 2
Press the red peel-off unit 6 inwards.
Fig. 31: BC II 100 Label printer

Turn the take-up pin 1 manually until
the first label is peeled off.
Close the thermal print head, see page
5 - 10.
Close the side cover and printer lid, see
page 5 - 8.
5 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.18
1
Paper track in label printer 11
10
1 Take-up arbor for backing paper 2
9
2 Collar
8
3 Holding arbor
4 Label roll 3
5 Deflection pin with red adjustable ring 5
6 Thermal strip
7 Printer roller
8 Label detachment shaft
9 Deflection pin
7
10 Transport roller
11 Deflection roller with adjustable ring 6 4
5
Abb. 32: Paper track in label printer /

BCII800
1
1 Take-up arbor for backing paper 10 2 3
9
2 Collar
3 Holding arbor 8
4 Label roll
5 Deflection pin with red adjustable ring
6 Thermal strip
7 Printer roller
8 Label detachment shaft 5 4
9 Deflection pin 7 6
10 Transport roller
Abb. 33: Paper track in label printer /
BCII100/200
Set width of paper
Adjust the red adjustable ring 5 to the

deflection roller by pushing it to the size
of the label. 5
This is necessary for each paper change
and when changing the paper width.
Fig. 34: Adjustable ring
6.111.98.5.01.18 5 - 13
5
5 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Operation
6 Operation
6.1 Switching on device
The mains switch<On-Off> is located
- on the left side of the scale in the case of BCII 100 / BCII 200
- on the right side of the scale in the case of BCII 800.
The scale should not be loaded. 6
Press mains switch <On-Off>.

”Boot” appears in the display.
The display test occurs automatically.
All digits and symbols are displayed for approx. 5 sec..
The weight value display is then automatically set to zero ”0.000” with the
scale unloaded and is ready for weighing.
6.2 Switch off device
Press mains switch <On-Off>.

The display goes dark after a short time.
6.3 Zerosetting device

After switching on the scale the weight display ranges automatically at zero ”0.000” kg
provided that the scale is unloaded.
The scale has an automatic reset device, so that minor zero point changes are
compensated automatically.
The weight value display can (if the display is not set to zero) be reset again with the scale
unloaded.
) ]
0 Press <Zerosetting>.
The weight value display indicates ”0,000” kg.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6-1
Operation Operating instruction BC II
6.4 Operating options

Operating processes marked with an * are not available for all country versions.
Different operating types can be set in the device:
1. Multi-operating mode see page 6-2
2. Self-service operation see page 6 - 3
3. Quick-service operation see page 6 - 4
4. Price labeling with manual triggering * see page 6 - 6
6 5. Price labeling with automatic start * see page 6 - 7
6.4.1 Multiple-operator mode

Multiple salespeople can operate the device at the same time.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01 Set multiple operator mode
- Pr 510/ 02 Set ticket or label layout
- Pr 510/ 04 Set type of paper
- Pr 520 Set submenu 01 to 08.
General operating procedure

Place the article on the scale.
Input price
! @
2 Press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU2>.
or
Enter the unit price directly, e.g. EUR 2.98
PLU registration
1 Press operator key e.g.<OP1>.

Ticket layout: The article is registered but not printed.
Label layout: The article is registered and the label is printed.
Printout of the article depends on the menu setting Pr
520/02.
Conclude sale
Press <total>.
1 Press the operator key, e.g. <OP1>.

Ticket layout: Item and total are printed on ticket.
Label layout: Printout of the article and the total depends on the menu setting Pr 520/02,
see page 7 - 95.
6-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.4.2 Self-service mode

_______________________________________________________________________
The article can only be called up via on PLU direct key.
- Only PLU direct keys under which weight articles are stored can
be called up. Piece PLU, manual PLU or minus PLU cannot be
called up - you hear an acoustic signal.
- Reports cannot be created in this operating mode.
_______________________________________________________________________
6
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01 Setting self-service mode
- Pr 510/ 02 1 Setting label layout
- Pr 510/ 04 -1 Set label paper
Operating procedure:
Print article
! @
2 Press the PLU direct key of the article applied e.g. <PLU2>.
The label is printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6-3
6.4.3 Quick-service mode

Register with operator key
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 02 -1 Setting label layout
- Pr521 -0 Recording with operator key
6 Place the article on the scale.
Call up article
! @
2 Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU2>.
Register article and print
1 Press operator key <VK1>.

or (dependent on country)
Press <Print>.
Register automatically
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 02 -1 Setting label layout
- Pr 521 -1 register automatically
Call up article, then register and print

! @
It is registered to Operator 1.
6-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Automatic recording with fixed PLU

Customer-specific
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -03 Set quick-service operation
- Pr 510/ 02 -1 Set label layout
- Pr 521 -1 Automatic recording
- Pr 631/ 01 84-keyboard with 24 key self-service frame
Place product on scale. 6
Call up, record and print article
! @
2 Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU 2>.
Recording with respect to Operator 1.
The label is printed. The called up PLU remains unchanged until another PLU is
called up.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6-5
6.4.4 Price labeling with manual triggering *
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 Price labeling with release by hand
- Pr 510/ 02 -1 Label layout
- Pr 525/ 01 Setting labeling mode
Call up article
6 Place the article on the scale.
! @
The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.
Register article and print label

Remove the article from the scale.
Place the next article on the scale.

You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called
up, or until the <C> key is pressed.
Create batch sum label *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition
Press <total>.
The batch sum label is printed.
6-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.4.5 Price labeling with automatic start *
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -05 Price labeling with automatic release
- Pr 525/ 01 Setting labeling mode
Call up article
6
''
The PLU is called up and at the same time, the constant function is activated.
Register article and print label

Remove the article from the scale.
The label is printed. Printing happens automatically after each change of weight.
You can label via the PLU that has been called up until a different PLU is called
up, or until the <C> key is pressed.
Create batch sum label *

Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition
Press <Total>.
The batch sum label is printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6-7
6.4.6 Piece price multi- label printing

A number of identical price per piece labels can be created in price labeling mode.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 Price labeling
- Pr525/ 02 -00-99 Time in sec. between printing of two labels

Input price.
6 $
4 Press the PLU direct key for unit
price e.g. <PLU4>.
K
The constant function 1 is activated. 1,50
1
Define number of labels
K
Press <Multiplication> . 00 1,50
K
Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15. 15 1,50
PLU registration

K
The labels are printed. 14 1,50
The number of labels being printed is K
continually displayed. 00 1,50
End
K
Press <C>. 0,000 0, 00 0,00
6-8 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.4.7 Fixed weight label multi-printing

A number of identical fixed weight labels can be created in price labeling mode.
Menu setting
- Pr 510/01 -04 or 05 Price labeling
- Pr525/ 02 -00-99 Time in sec. between printing of two labels

$
4 Press the PLU direct key for fixed 6
1
weight e.g. <PLU5>. K
The constant function 1 is activated. 0,500 12, 00 6,00
Define number of labels
+ Press and hold <Shift>. Then press

K
<Multiplication> __
K
Enter the number of labels, e.g. 15. 15
Press <Enter>
The number of labels is herewith confirmed.
PLU registration

K
The labels are printed. 0,500 12, 00 6,00
End
Press <C>.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6-9
6.5 Unit price input via 10-key keypad

_______________________________________________________________________
With key you can switch between entry of unit price and PLU no.
Switchover depends on the setting in Pr 535.

_______________________________________________________________________
6.5.1 Operating processes for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)
6 Unit price input Price/kg
Place article on the scale. 0,556 0,00 0,00
Enter the unit price.

Read off the selling price. 0,556 8,56 4,76
1 Register
e.g. on operator <VK1>.
The selling price is saved to the
buffer.
Price per piece manual input

Non-weighed
Press <non-weighed>. 0,00
Non-weighed
Enter the price per piece,
8,65
e.g. 8.65
1 Register [1]
e.g. on operator <VK1>. 0,000 0,00 0,00
Multiplication of price per piece non-weighed

Non-weighed
Press <non-weighed>. 0,00
Non-weighed
Enter the price per piece,
8,65
e.g. 8.65
Non-weighed
Press <multiplication>. _0 8,65
Non-weighed
Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5. _5 8,65
1 Register [1]
e.g. on operator <VK1>. 0,000 0,00 0,00
6 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.18
Entry of minus amount

Minus
- Press <Minus amount>. 0,00
Enter the price per piece, Minus

e.g. 1.00 - 1,00
1 Register [1]
e.g. on operator <VK1>. 0,000 0,00 0,00
6
Multiplication of minus amount input
Minus
- Press <Minus input> 0,00
Minus
Enter the price per piece, - 1,00
e.g. 1.00
Minus
Press <multiplication>. _0 - 1,00
Minus
Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 5. _5 - 1,00
1 Register [1]
e.g. on operator <VK1>. 0,000 0,00 0,00
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 11
6.6 Cancellation
If the sale is not yet completed (before final total), individual articles can be canceled.
Cancel lastly sold article

Op.
[1]
Pcs Press <Cancellation>. 0,00
1 Press operator key e.g.<OP1>. [1]

8,60
6 The last items are displayed.
St Press <Cancellation>. [1]

The displayed items are canceled. 0,000 0,00 0,00
Search for article by ”Scrolling” and cancelling

Several articles have already been sold; a defined article is now to be canceled.
St Press <Cancellation>.

The last items are displayed.
Scroll until the article you want appears on the display.
St Press <Cancellation>.
The displayed items are canceled.
Quit cancellation
You start the Cancel function and want to abort this without starting a cancellation.
Op.
Pcs Press <Cancellation>. [1]
0,00

[1]
The last items are displayed. 8,60
Press <Clear>. [1]

0,000 0,00 0,00
You have quit the Cancel function. The article is still registered.
6 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.7 Scroll function

After selling several articles (before total completion) the single articles can be checked in
the display by<Scrolling>
Pcs Press <Cancellation>.

The last items are displayed.
<Scrolling>upwards.
6
The items are displayed in descending order.
Press <Clear>.
The scroll function is closed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 13
6.8 Constant
Fix unit price or tare value, or unit price and tare value, e.g. for several sequenced sales of
the same article. Depending on menu setting in Pr520/ 01.
PLU articles are fixated if you hold down the constant key, independent of the setting in Pr
520/ 01.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 01 Constant key function
6
Switch on fixing.
The symbol illuminates before or (dependent on country).
Switch off fixing.
The symbol before or goes out (depending on country)
6.9 Subtotal
The subtotal can be displayed (but not deleted) after the sale of one or more articles.
Op.
Press <Subtotal>. [1]
0,00
Total
1 Press operator key e.g.<OP1>. [1]
8,60
The subtotal is displayed.
6.10 Total
The final total occurs after the sale of one or more articles.
Op.
[1]
Press <Total>. 0,00
Total
1 Press operator key e.g.<OP1>. * [1]
8,60
The total is displayed.
The registered items and the total are printed.
The buffer for operator 1 is cleared.
6 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.11 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU)

6.11.1 Calling up PLUs
Prerequisite
- Pr 110/ PLU no/ Submenu 1 to 14 PLU articles are created
The PLU call can be implemented by two methods:
- Press the PLU direct key.
- PLU-no. entry via ten-key keypad.
6
PLU direct key
Stored PLUs can be called up directly via PLU direct keys.
Tab
The stored values for PLU 1 appear in the display.
Second level of PLU direct keys

With <Shift> twice as many PLUs can be accessed directly, as defined on the keyboard.
Tab
+ 1 Press and hold <Shift> and then press PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU1>.
The stored values for PLU 51, for example, appear in the display.
Example 1:
There are 50 PLU direct keys on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift> +<PLU1> PLU 51 is
accessed.
Example 2:
30 PLU direct keys are defined with Pr 631 on the keyboard. By pressing <Shift>
+<PLU1> PLU 31 is accessed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 15
PLU input with ten-digit keyboard

The input depends on the menu setting Pr5 35. As an example, select PLU1:
Menu setting
- Pr 535/01 -0 Ten-digit keyboard: Unit price input
- Pr 535/ 02 Number of PLU input digits
Operating procedure
Press <Switching>,
PLU ___
6 and PLU number on the 10-key
keypad, e.g. <1>.
PLU __1
Confirm with <Enter>.
Calf liver paté 0.002
PLU 1 is displayed.
-0,002 12,55
_______________________________________________________________________
Operating procedure
- If all digits are entered, it must not be confirmed with <Enter>. The
PLU is displayed immediately.
- If a delay time is set in Pr 535/ 06, the PLU is displayed after a time
delay. This must not be confirmed with <Enter>.
_______________________________________________________________________
or
Menu setting
- Pr 535/01 -1 Ten-digit keyboard: PLU input
- Pr 535/ 02 Number of PLU input digits
Operating procedure
Press the PLU number on the

ten-digit keypad, e.g. <1>.
PLU ___ ___1
Calf liver paté 0.002
PLU 1 is displayed.
-0,002 12,55
6 - 16 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.11.2 Operator sales with PLU

Call up PLU and register with PLU direct key.

Tab
1 Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.

6
”Overwrite” PLU unit price”.
The unit price for the article (PLU unit price) is stored. When the PLU is called up the
saved unit price is displayed. If price-overwriting is permitted, the unit price may be
changed. If the PLU is called up again, the stored unit price is still valid.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06-1 Price overwriting permissible

Tab
Press <Switching>,
Enter the unit price, e.g. 20.30
1 Register, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.
Multiplication of PLU price per piece with input number of pieces
Press a PLU direct key with stored Smoked sausage

article type is ”Non-weighed” or 1,50
”Minus”, e.g. <PLU 4>.
Smoked sausage
Press <Multiplication>. 0 1,50
Smoked sausage
Enter the number of pieces, e.g. 22. 22 1,50
1 Register [1]
e.g. on operator 1 <VK1>. 0,000 0,00 0,00
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 17
Register manual weight input ( depending on country)

Menu setting
- Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on.
- Setting into operation see page 7 - 33
Press a PLU direct key with stored Smoked sausage

PLU type is ”Non-weighed” or 0,118 3,49 0,40
”Minus”, e.g. <PLU 4>.
6 Smoked sausage
Press <multiplication>. 0,000 3,49 0,00
Enter the known weight, e.g.

0.220kg. Smoked sausage
0,220 3,49 0,76
Press <Enter>
Entry confirmed, selling price is
displayed.
1 Register [1]
e.g. on operator 1 <VK1>. 0,000 0,00 0,00
6 - 18 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.12 Tare functions

6.12.1 Tare balancing for unknown tare values
_______________________________________________________________________
An unknown tare weight ( empties) is a non-article related tare which

is to be weighed and tared.
- For scales under a 10 kg weighing range, the entire weighing
range can be tared. 6
- For scales over a 10 kg weighing range, only up to max. 9.995 kg
(max. 4-digit) can be tared (country-dependent).
- The tared value is subtracted from the total weighing range.
- The tare command is only directly executed when the weight
display is stationary.
- If an unknown tare was tared with key <Tare>, it cannot be
overwritten with a known tare (hand tare, PLU tare).
- After balancing an unknown tare, a PLU call is possible with PLU
tare, but the PLU tare is ignored.
_______________________________________________________________________
Unknown tare
Weigh article as an empty with unknown weight.
Place the empty container on the scale.

The weight display 1 indicates the weight of
the empty container e.g.: ”0,535” kg. 0,535 0,00 0,00
Press <tare>. 0,535

0,000 0,00 0,00
The tare display 2 indicates the weight of the
empty container, ”0.535” kg. 1 2
The weight display 1 indicates zero.

0,535
NET
2,000 0,00 0,00
Fill the empty container with the article.
The weight display 1 indicates the net 1 2
weight of the article ”2,000” kg.

The tare display 2 indicates the weight of
the empty container, ”0.535” kg.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 19
Batch tare (country-related)

Determine unknown tare, weigh article, add this to the tare weight and weigh the next
article net.
Place the empty container on the scale.

0,535 0,00 0,00
The weight display 1 indicates the
weight of the empty container, e.g.: 1
”0,535” kg.
6 Press <Tare>. 0,535

The tare display 2 indicates the weight 0,000 0,00 0,00
of the empty container, ”0.535” kg. 2
1
0,535
NET
Fill the empty container with the article. 0,800 0,00 0,00
The weight display 1 indicates the net
weight of the article ”0.800” kg. 1 2
The tare display 2 indicates the weight

of the empty container, ”0.535” kg.
Press <tare>. 1,353

NET
Weight of article and of empty container 0,000 0,00 0,00
are added to the new tare weight 2 . 2
1
For scales under 10 kg you can tare the entire

weighing range.
6 - 20 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.12.2 Tare balancing for known tare values

_______________________________________________________________________
Known tare
- When weighing a packaged article, the tare value must be known

(packaging/product-related tare).
- For multiple-division scales, the known tare must always be located
within the smallest division range (country-dependent).
6
- A known (input) tare cannot be overwritten by an unknown
(weighed) tare.
- The known tare can be input by 2 methods:
1. Manual tare
2. Tare with PLU tare
_______________________________________________________________________
Manual tare (country-related)

_______________________________________________________________________
Manual taring is not allowed in various countries.
_______________________________________________________________________
Prerequisite
- The scale should not be loaded. Weight value ”0,000” kg.
Press <Tare>. _,___

The manual tare input is opened. 0,000 0,00 0,00
Enter the known tare value, e.g.

_,_52
0,052 kg.
0,000 0,00 0,00
Press <Tare>.
The input tare value is accepted. 0,052
NET
The display shows the tare 2 value and -0,052 0,00 0,00
the net weight value 1 .
1 2
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 21
PLU tare
Assign known tare value in menu Pr 110 to the respective PLU article.
Menu setting
- Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03
Enter article-related tare values
The PLU tare value is activated and displayed via the PLU call.
Tab Calf liver paté 0.002

6 1 Press e.g. <PLU1>. NET
-0,002 0,00 0,00
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4
Menu setting
- Pr 540 Allocate known tare values to the tare keys
0,004
T1 Press e.g. <Fixed tare T1>. NET
-0,004 0,00 0,00
The saved tare value is displayed.
Tare clearing
1. Manual
Unload the scale.
Press <T>.
The display indicates zero.
2. Automatically
1 Register article, e.g. on operator 1 <OP1>.
Unload the scale.

The display indicates zero. The unit price is also deleted.
6 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.12.3 Operator tare

An operator can save a tare value on an operator key. This tare value can be called up
any time.
Prerequisite
- Pr 630 Key <Operator Tare> must exist.
- Pr 630 Key <Save Operator Tare> must exist.
Save tare value weighed

Save tare value of an empty container on operator key e.g. <OP1>.
6
Place empty container on scale. 0,060 0,00 0,00
Op.
F12 <Press Save Operator Tare>.
0,060 0,00 0,00
0,060
1 Press operator key<OP1>.
0,000 0,00 0,00
Tare value is displayed. 0,060
-0,060 0,00 0,00
Remove empty container from scale.
Press
Tare key <T>.
The tare display is deleted. The tare 0,000 0,00 0,00
value is saved under operator key
<OP1>.
Save tare value entered

Op.
F13 <Press Save Operator Tare>.
0,000 0,00 0,00
Op. -,- - -
0,000 0,00 0,00
The input field is displayed.
Oper. 0,070
Enter tare value, e.g. 0.070kg. 0,000 0,00 0,00
0,070
Press tare key <T>. -0,070 0,00 0,00
Press tare key <T>.

The tare display is deleted. The tare 0,000 0,00 0,00
value is saved under operator key
<OP1>.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 23
Call up operator tare saved

Scale is unloaded and in untared condition.
Op.
F13 Press<Operator Tare>.
0,000 0,00 0,00
”Oper.” is displayed.
1 Press operator key<OP1>. 0,070

The saved tare value is displayed. -0,070 0,00 0,00
6
6 - 24 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.13 Assisted sales with ticket
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode
- Pr 510/ 02 -0 Ticket layout
Set the ticket paper at the label printer
- Pr 510/ 04 -0 Ticket paper
Example: Operator 1 sells various articles that are programmed in the scale, cancels the last
article sold and concludes the sale with the total.
6
Apply article on scale
Tab
1 Call up article (weighed) with PLU
direct key e.g. <PLU1>.
1 Register article on <OP1> 1 .

1
Remove product from the scale.
2
! @
2 Call up next article (hand),
e.g. <PLU 2>. 3

4
''
3 Call up next article (minus),
e.g. <PLU 3>.

Fig. 35: Print example
St Open cancellation function.
1 Press operator key<OP1>
St Confirm cancellation
Last item is canceled 4 .
Open total printing.
Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed, see printing example.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 25
6.14 Talon
The talon includes the number of items and the total. It helps the operator check
everything later. The talon is automatically printed after the total printout. A delay of
between 1 and 99 seconds can occur.
The delay can be interrupted by pressing the <Total> key. The talon is then printed
immediately.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 06 -01 up to 99 seconds delay in printing
6 1 Ticket counter
2 Operator number 1
3 Total
4 No. of items
2
4 3
Fig. 36: Talon example
6.15 Print ticket upon request

In multi-operation mode the ticket printout can be triggered after sales process is finished,
if requested. If the key combination<Shift> and <OP> is not pressed, the total occurs only
in the display.
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 11 -0 Print ticket only upon request
Operating procedure: Ticket printing upon request

Tab
1 Call up article (weighed) with PLU direct key Calf
NET
liver paté 0.002
e.g. <PLU1>. 0,498 12,55 6,25
1 Register article on <OP1>.
Press<Total>
Total
Press operator key<OP1>. 6,25
1
The total is displayed.
On request:
+ 1 <Press> Shift and press then operator key <OP1>.

The ticket is printed.
6 - 26 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.16 Repeat ticket
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 07 -1 with -Repeat ticket-
The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.

Prerequisite
- Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.
2 1
6
+ 1 Press and hold <Shift>. Then
press operator key 1 <OP1>
A copy is printed.
You can tell the copy from the
original by the asterisk 1 after the
ticket number 2 .
Fig. 37: Repeat ticket
6.17 Open ticket again
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 08 -1 with -Re-open ticket-
If the customer requires further items after printout of the ticket, a completed ticket can be
re-opened.
There are 2 ways of opening a ticket again.
- Open the last ticket via the operator key.
- Open a ticket via the ticket number
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 27
6.17.1 Open the last ticket via the operator key.
Prerequisite
- Ticket completion with <total> and operator key e.g. <OP1>.
Open the last ticket:
Ctrl + Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

press <Enter>. ____
6
1 Press operator key e.g. [1]
OP1<.> 0,000 0,00 0,00
The last ticket is now open. Additional articles may now be sold.
Finalize the re-opened ticket:
Press <Total>.
1 Press <OP1>.
Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.
6.17.2 Open the ticket via ticket number

Open ticket again:
Ctrl + Press and hold <CTRL>. Then

press <Enter>. ____
Enter the ticket number<8> ___8
[1]
press <Enter> 0,000 0,00 0,00
Ticket no. 8 is open again. The operator number is shown in the display.
Additional articles can be sold via the displayed operator number.
Finalize the re-opened ticket:
Press <Total>.
1 Press e.g.<OP1>.
Sold articles, canceled articles and total are printed.
6 - 28 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.17.3 Overwrite VAT from PLU

A VAT rate is assigned to PLU. If PLU is called up, a different VAT rate can be assigned to
the PLU with the VAT key.
Prerequisite
- Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 20 -1 The PLU is assigned to a VAT rate number from 1-5.
- Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 -1 The VAT can be overwritten.
- Pr630 The VAT key can be found on the keyboard.
- Pr631/ 03 re-programmed keyboard is set
Operating procedure: 6
Tab
1 Call up article with PLU direct key, e. g. <PLU 1> with VAT number 1 (19%)
II Press VAT key, e. g. with VAT number 2 (7%)

Article is registered with 7% VAT
Press<Total>

The ticket is printed. After <Total> VAT from PLU is assigned to article.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 29
6.18 Serviced selling with label layout
Menu setting
- Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode
- Pr 510/ 03 -1 with addition of customer total
- Pr 520/ 02 -2 Only print article label
Example:
6 Operator <OP1> sells different articles that are programmed in the scales, and
cancels the article last sold.
Place article on the scale.
Tab
1 Call up article (weighed) via PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU1>.

The label is printed immediately.
Remove article from the scale.
! @
2 Call up next article (hand),
e.g. <PLU 2>.

''
3 Call up next article (minus), e.g. <PLU 3>.

St Open cancellation function.
St Cancel
Last item is canceled.
No label is printed for a cancellation.
Display total
1 Press <Total> and operator e.g. <OP1>

in sequence.
The total is displayed. No total label is printed.
6 - 30 6.111.98.5.01.18
By-Count
6.19 By Count article
_______________________________________________________________________
The By Count article type must be put into operation, see page
7 - 33.
_______________________________________________________________________
Sell By Count article

Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package) 6
- Pr 110/ 07 -3 By Count article type
- Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package
- PR 110/ 15 -1 with back calculation (price per piece is printed on label)
Operating procedure
$
4 Call up by-count article via PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU1>. Smoked sausage
3 1,50
The label with the package price 1

and the price per piece 2 is printed.
The price per piece is not printed on the

ticket.
2 1
Fig. 38: By Count label (1)
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 31
By-Count
By Count with mandatory input of number of pieces
The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. The package price is
recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no / 07-03 Article type by-count (price per package in relation to
number of pieces)
- PR 110/ 15 -1 with back calculation (price per piece)
- Pr 110/ 16 -1 with mandatory input
6
Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces
$
4 Call up by-count article via PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU1>. Smoked sausage
Input of number of pieces is required Quantity 3 1,50
3 1,50
Enter number of pieces, e.g. <5>

The new number of pieces per package
and the calculated package price are Quantity
displayed. 5 2,50
The label with the new package

price 1 and the price per piece 2 is
printed.

ticket.
2 1
6 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.18
By-Count
By Count with overwriting of package price
The set package price can be overwritten. The price per piece is recalculated.
Menu setting
number of pieces)
- PR 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted
Operating procedure with overwriting of package price

6
$
4 Call up by-count article via PLU Smoked sausage
direct key e.g. <PLU 4>. 3 1,50
Smoked sausage
Press <Switch>
3 0,00
The package price is set to
”0.00”
Enter new package price Smoked sausage

e.g.5.00 3 5,00
The label with the new package

price 1 and the price per piece 2 is
printed.

ticket.
2 1
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 33
By-Count
By Count with overwriting of package price and number of pieces
The stored package price is overwritten. This changes the price per piece. The stored
number of pieces per package is then overwritten. The package price and the price per
piece are recalculated.
Menu setting
number of pieces)
6 - PR 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted
Operating procedure with overwriting of package price and number of pieces

$
Smoked sausage
Press <Switch>
3 0,00
”0.00”

e.g.<5.00> 3 5,00
Press key <Multiplication>

Smoked sausage
The number of pieces is set
to ”0” 0 5,00
Enter number of pieces,

e.g<5>
The new number of pieces and
Smoked sausage
the calculated package price are
displayed. 5 8,33
The label with the calculated package

price 1 and the calculated price per
piece 2 is printed.

2
ticket. 1
6 - 34 6.111.98.5.01.18
By-Count
By Count with overwriting of number of pieces and package price
The stored number of pieces per package can be overwritten. This changes the package
price. The final package price is then entered. The price per piece is recalculated.
Menu setting
number of pieces)
- PR 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permitted
6
Operating procedure with overwriting of number of pieces and package price
$
Press key <Multiplication>

Smoked sausage
The number of pieces is set
to ”0”. 0 1,50
Enter number of pieces, Smoked sausage

e.g<5> 5 2,50
The package price changes.
Smoked sausage
Press <Switch>
5 0,00
”0.00”

e.g.<0.75> 5 0,75
The label with the entered final

package price 1 and the calculated
price per piece is printed. 2

ticket. 2 1
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 35
Fixed weight
6.20 Fixed weight
The stored fixed weight of the article is used for price calculation instead of the weighed
weight.
_______________________________________________________________________
The fixed weight article type must be put into operation like the By
Count article type, see page 7 - 33.
_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
6 - Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per fixed weight)
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 07-4 Type fixed weighed
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -0 Unit price referring to 1kg or 1 Lib
- Pr 110/PLU no./17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of article)
Operating procedure
F
22 Call up fixed weight article via PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU 22>. Tin of sausage
0,125 2,20 0,28
The ticket with selling price 1 and

fixed weight is printed. 2
Fig. 43: Fixed weight (1)
Fixed weight with mandatory input

The fixed weight must always be entered in the sale.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 19 -1 with mandatory input of fixed weight
6 - 36 6.111.98.5.01.18
Fixed weight
Operating procedure with mandatory input of fixed weight
F
22 Call up fixed weight article via
Tin of sausage
PLU direct key e.g.<PLU 22>.
0,125 220 0,28
Fixed weight input is required. Fixed weight
0,000
Fixed weight
6
Enter new fixed weights,
e.g<0150>. 0,150
Press <Enter> key.

The new fixed weight and the
Tin of sausage
calculated selling price are
displayed. 0,150 220 0,33
The new fixed weight 1 and the selling 1

price 2 are printed.
Fixed weight with overwriting of unit price

The stored unit price can be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 Price overwriting permissible
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 37
Fixed weight
Operating procedure for fixed weight with unit price overwrite
The selling price is determined with the new unit price and the stored fixed weight.
F
Tin of sausage
0,125 2,20 0,28
Press <Switch> Tin of sausage

6 The price is set to ”0.00”. 0,125 0,00 0,00
Enter new unit price, e.g.<200>. Tin of sausage

0,125 2,00 0,25
The new unit price 2 and the

calculated selling price 1 are printed.
Change fixed weight

Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 01
Unit price input
6 - 38 6.111.98.5.01.18
Fixed weight
Operating procedure for changing fixed weight
F
Tin of sausage
0,125 2,20 0,28
Press <Multiplication>.
Tin of sausage
The selling price disappears and 6
the fixed weight is set to ”0.000”. 0,000 2,20
Enter new fixed weight, Tin of sausage

e.g<0150>. 0,500 2,20 1,10
The calculated selling price is

displayed.
The new fixed weight 1 and the 1

6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 39
By Count fixed weight
6.21 By Count fixed weight
In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.
Sell By Count fixed weight article

Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per package)
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 07-5 By Count fixed weight article type (fixed weight and
price refer to pieces per package)
- Pr 110/ 08 -0 Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
6 - Pr 110/ 14 -(00-99) Number of pieces per package
- Pr 110/ 17 Enter fixed weight (fixed weight of package)
Operating procedure
D
21 Call By Count fixed weight article via PLU Tin of sausage
direct key, e.g. <PLU21>. 0,250 3 2,10
1
Fixed weight 1 and selling price 2
are printed.
Fig. 47: By Count fixed weight (1)
6 - 40 6.111.98.5.01.18
By Count fixed weight with mandatory input
The stored fixed weight per package must be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight article type
- Pr 110/ 19-1 with mandatory input of fixed weight
6
Operating procedure for By Count fixed weight with mandatory input
D
21 Call By Count fixed weight article
Tin of sausage
via PLU direct key, e.g. <PLU21>.
0,250 3 2,10
Fixed weight input is required. Fixed weight
0,000
Enter new fixed weight,
e.g<0500> g.
Fixed weight
0,500
Press <Enter> key.
The selling price remains the
Tin of sausage
same. The price per kg changes
but is not displayed. 0,500 3 2,10
2
The altered price per kg 1 and the
new fixed weight 2 are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 41
Change number of pieces
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight type
6 Operating procedure for changing the number of pieces

D
Tin of sausage
0,250 3 2,10
Press <Multiplication>.
Tin of sausage
The number of pieces is set to ”0”.
0,250 0 2,10

e.g<5>
The calculated selling price and
Tin of sausage
the new fixed weight are displayed
immediately. 0,417 5 3,50
1
The new fixed weight 1 and the
6 - 42 6.111.98.5.01.18
By Count fixed weight with mandatory input of number of pieces
The stored number of pieces per package must be overwritten.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 16-1 with mandatory input of number of pieces
6
Operating procedure with mandatory input of number of pieces
D
Tin of sausage
0,250 3 2,10
Input of number of pieces is required Number of pieces
0,250 3 2,10
e.g<7>
The calculated selling price and
Number of pieces
the new fixed weight are displayed
immediately. 0,583 7 4,90
The new package price 1 and the 2

number of pieces 2 are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 43
By Count fixed weight with overwriting of the package price
The set package price can be overwritten. The price per kg is recalculated.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 07 -5 By Count fixed weight article type
- Pr 110/ 06 -1 Price overwrite permissible
6 Operating procedure with overwriting of package price
D
Tin of sausage
0,250 3 2,10
Press <Switch>
Tin of sausage
”0.00”. 0,250 3 0,00
Enter new package price Tin of sausage

e.g.<500> 0,250 3 5,00
The new package price 1 and the new

kg price 2 are printed.
2
1
6 - 44 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.22 Scale with cash drawer and payment in /out
Menu setting
- Pr 520/ 04 Cash register function
- Pr 520/ 05 Payment in/out
- Pr 550/ 12 -1 Print out amount paid in/due on ticket
Operating procedure
Record the article. 6

Press <Total>. Op.
[1]
0,00
1 Press the operator key, e.g.
<OP1>. Total
* [1]
2,71
The customer pays the exact amount

If exact amount, close sales
Payment out
with total key. * [1]
0,00
The ticket is printed and the cash drawer opens.
Customer pays, for example with 5.00 €

Payment in
* [1]
Enter the amount. 5,00
Delete the incorrect entry with <C> and enter the amount again.
Payment out
* [1]
Save input. 2,29
The ticket is printed, the cash
drawer opens and the change is
indicated.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 45
6.23 Product with data of origin

When selling beef, for example, the customer should be provided with information on
origin, rearing, place of slaughter and possibly breed. The beef is marked with a
traceability number, which is entered when sold.
Traceability data is printed on the ticket or label for the serviced selling mode and price
labeling.
The weight of the sold meat and the number of items are saved in the traceability data
sales report.
6 There are two possible operating procedures for products with data of origin:
- Input traceability no. manually.
- Use defined traceability no.
6.23.1 Sale with manual input of the traceability number
Prerequisite
Traceability texts have to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no. 10.
PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 with traceability number
- Pr 515/ 03 - 1 Input traceability no. manually
Operating procedure
Place the beef, for example, on the scales.
Tab
1 Press the PLU direct key
e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).
If the product contains traceability
data, the weight, unit price and
selling price are only displayed
0,206 12,55 2,59
briefly.
A prompt to input the abbreviated

traceability number then appears.
__
Enter the traceability number, e.g. 02. 02

Traceability number 02 corresponds to PLU number 9902.
Confirm the entry.
The weight, unit price and selling

0,206 12,55 2,59
are are displayed again.
1 Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.
6 - 46 6.111.98.5.01.18
6.23.2 Sale with fixed traceability number.
Prerequisite
A traceability text has to be defined in Pr 110/ PLU no./10.
PLU no. 9900 to 9999 are reserved for traceability texts.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 09 - 1 with traceability number
- Pr 515/ 04 - 00-99 Define traceability number
- Pr 515/ 03 - 2 Use defined traceability no. 6
All products (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text from the
set traceability number.
Operating procedure
Place the beef, for example, on the scales.

Tab
1 Press the PLU direct key e.g. <PLU 1> (beef).
If the product includes traceability data, the set traceability number is
automatically processed. The weight, unit and selling price are displayed. The
traceability numbers is not displayed.
1 Registerfor example at Operator 1 <OP1>.

The sold quantity is booked separately in the traceability data sales report.
6.111.98.5.01.18 6 - 47
6
6 - 48 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Programming
7 Programming
Menus marked with an asteriks *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all
country versions.
7.1 Initial display

If the display is assigned, press <C>.
1 Net weight display
2 Unit price display 1 2 3
3 Selling price display 7
0,000 0,00 0,00
kg T kg Price/kg Price
Fig. 52: Initial display
7.2 Menu password

No password
The device is supplied without a password.
Menu call-up is carried out with having to enter a password.
PASS
With password ______
Activate password entry, see Pr 690 on page
7 - 159.
Once the password input has been activated, a
correct password has to be entered.
The password consists of 6 figures.
PASS
An symbol appears in the display for each
figure that is entered.
If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7-1
Programming Operating instruction BC II
7.3 Menu call-up, menu selection and quit menu

Menu is called up from the scales' initial display.
General programming sequence
1. Menu call-up
Press the <Mod>key.
2. Menu selection
Enter the program number via the 10-key keypad.
Menu text is displayed. Confirm via the <Enter> key.
3. Submenu selection
Enter the submenu number or scroll to submenu using the arrow keys and confirm by
7 pressing <Enter>.
4. Make settings
Confirm settings with <Enter> key.
5. Exit menu
Press the <Mod>key.
Example:
Menu call-up Pr
Mod Menu call-up
Menu selection Pr115

Select menu
Print PLU list
The menu text is displayed.
PLU list: all texts
confirm 01
No. and text of first submenu item are displayed, e.g. 01
Submenu selection PLU list: only one text

Enter submenu no., e.g. 02 02
or
Scroll in menu using arrow keys.
confirm
7-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Make settings
PLU list: only one text
Enter beginning of range, 02 ____11-999999
e.g. PLU No. 11
confirm
PLU list: only one text
Enter end of range 02 000011-____25
e.g. PLU No.25
confirm
The list, from PLU no. 11 to PLU no. 25, is printed. 7
Exit menu
Mod Exit menu.
The scale returns to the initial display.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7-3
Input correction
Error inputs can be undone by pressing key <Clear>.
Press key <Escape> to go to previous level, the old values remain intact.
Key <Clear>to clear entry.
Esc Use key <Escape> to go to previous level.
_______________________________________________________________________
If single items were registered and no total has been created, it is not
possible to switch to the programming mode.
7 The operator accounts have to be closed.
_______________________________________________________________________
7.4 Initial scale setting

Set the type of paper to be used. Pr
Call up menu
Pr505
Select menu 1
Pr505
Select type of paper
0
0= Ticket paper
1= Label paper (only possible for label printer)
confirm
Set the desired main operating mode.

Set main operating mode and print layout in menu Pr510,
see page 7 - 87 and 7 - 111.
e.g. setting multi-operating mode Pr510/01 -01
and ticket layout Pr 510/ 02-0
Design ticket Pr 550, see page 7 - 111
Set paper type Pr 510/ 04, see page 7 - 88.
Set the required switching operation mode.

Set switching operation mode and print layout in menu Pr511,
see page 7 - 89 and 7 - 118.
e.g. setting multi-operating mode Pr511/01 -01
and label layout Pr 511/ 02-1
Design label Pr 555, see page 7 - 118
Set paper type Pr 511/ 04, see page 7 - 90.
7-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.5 Overview of list
Requirement
- Insert the ticket paper for scales with a label printer.
- Pr 510/ 04 -0 Select ticket paper
7.5.1 PLU article

print, see Pr 115, page 7 - 53
Create see Pr 110, on page7 - 42
1 Scale number
2 Unit price 7
11 1
3 Tare
4 Article with data of origin 10 2
5 Price overwriting permissible
9
6 PLU text 3
7 Shelf-life days 8
7
8 Barcode
4
9 Product group number 6
5
10 PLU number / article number
11 Date and time
Fig. 53: Article list
7.5.2 Header and footer texts

print, see Pr 205/ 02 on page 7 - 58
1 Scale number
2 Enter header or footer text 4 1
3 Text number
4 Date and time
3
2
Fig. 54: Header and footer text list
6.111.98.5.01.18 7-5
7.5.3 Additional texts

see Pr 205/ 01 on page 7 - 58
1 Scale number
2 Supplement. text
3 Text number 4
4 Date and time
3
7
2 1
Fig. 55: Suppl. text list
7.5.4 Scrolling message
Print, see Pr 205/ 03 page 7 - 58
1 Scale no 4
2 Scrolling message text
3 Scrolling message number
4 Date and time
3 2 1
Fig. 56: Scrolling message list
7.5.5 PLU direct keys

print, see Pr 536, page 7 - 107
change see Pr 535 on page 7 - 104
1 PLU number (article no.)
2 PLU direct key
2 1
Fig. 57: PLU direct keys
7-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.5.6 Barcode structure

, see Pr 211, page7 - 65
1 Structure number
2 Barcode format
3 Field 1 code constant
4 Content field 1 1
5 Field 2 part string from PLU 2
6 No. of digits for field 2 3
7 Field 3 price 4 7
6
9 Conversion of variable values
7 8 9
Fig. 58: Barcode structures
7.5.7 BLD labels

BLD= Bizerba Label Designer.
Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.
Printout of BLD label numbers.
Print list, see Pr 220/01, see page7 - 71
Delete list, see Pr 225/01, see page 7 - 71.
Create layout with BLD. Example of BLD label see page 7 - 119.
1 Scale number
2 Label name (enter in BLD)
3 Label name (enter in BLD) 4
4 Date and time
2 1
Fig. 59: Example of BLD label list
6.111.98.5.01.18 7-7
7.5.8 Logos
Printout of logo saved in the scales.
_______________________________________________________________________
Logos can be designed in the BLD. The BLD logos are given a
number and sent to the scales where they are stored.
If a logo exists in the scales with the same number, the existing logo is
replaced by the BLD logo.
If this BLD logo is deleted in the scales (Pr 225/02) the previous logo
stored under this number is available again.
7 _______________________________________________________________________
Print, see Pr 220/ 02 on page 7 - 71
Delete see Pr 225/02, see page 7 - 72
1 Scale number
5
2 Logo name 1
3 Logo
4 Logo ID
5 Date and time
4
2
3
Fig. 60: Example of logo list
7-8 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.5.9 VAT rates

Printing saved VAT rates.
Print see Pr 231/ 01 on page 7 - 74
Delete see Pr 231/02, see page 7 - 74
1 VAT number 1
2 VAT rate
3 VAT text
2
7
4 Including or excluding VAT
3 4
6.111.98.5.01.18 7-9
7.6 General procedure for text input

Texts are entered in the program menus:
- Pr 200 supplementary text,
- Pr 201 header and footer texts
- PR 202 scrolling message
- Pr110/ PLU no. / 10 PLU article texts
1 Font type
Pr200
2 Line number (line 1)
C 1500 LI H-
3 Available memory space (in byte)
7
3 2 1
Fig. 61: Example of display

Font H
H- The font is determined by the selected layout (ticket or label)
H15 The font type is 15 (Script 15).
Change font 1
Clr + Press and hold <CTRL>. Then press <0>.
l
Enter the font, e.g.15
H1 _15_
^15;I
Press key<Enter>.
C 1496 L1 H 15
The font is now Script 15. Also for
the following lines
_______________________________________________________________________
The font can be changed any time. Within the text of a line or in the
next line. The last font set applies until the next change.
_______________________________________________________________________
The overview of font types (script) in the scale

can be printed out via Pr 702.
Fig. 62: Font 4-9
7 - 10 6.111.98.5.01.18
Change line 2
CR
45 Press key <CR> for the next Pr200
line. C 1499 L2 H15
Change up and down between existing lines.
Save entry
Pr200
Press key<Enter>. C 1499 L2 H15
7
Keys with alpha and special characters
Lower case is generally selected by pressing the key.
Character a:
A
19 Press key<19>.
Character A:
A
+ 19 Press and hold key <Shift>,
then press key <19>.
If there are 2 characters on a key, these must be called up as follows:

Character ß:
ß?
39 Press key<39>.
Character ?:
ß?
Ctrl + 39 Press and hold key <Control>.
then press key<39>.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 11
Special character:
Example of decimal input of unicode characters.
Character I: Pr200
C 1500 LI H-
Ctrl + Press and hold <Ctrl>.
then press <4>. l
UCd _____
Press the decimal figures for
l
the unicode for the desired
7 character. UCd __8364
|
C 1498 LI H-
Enter example of hex value input.

Character I: Pr200
C 1500 LI H-
Ctrl + Press and hold <Ctrl>.
l
then press <2>.
UCH ____
A C
19 30 Enter the hex value for the l
requested character. UCH _20Ac
|
C 1498 LI H-
7 - 12 6.111.98.5.01.18
CTRL Sequences in the editor
Shortcuts Function
CTRL + 0 Change font
CTRL + 1 Activate and deactivate Pinyin mode
Only for Chinese program
and dot seven display. 1
CTRL + 2 Enter Unicode hexadecimal number
CTRL + 3 GB 3212 mode
Only for Chinese program
CTRL + 4 Enter Unicode decimal number
7
1 In Pinyin Mode there is an automatic switching in the Pinyin input, if a character A to Z
is selected in the Editor.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 13
Function keys of text input
delete final character
Delete line
8 9 Move cursor in text to the left or right
7 Control printout of current text line
Control printout of all text lines
Text example
Enter article text, e.g.: Raclètte cheese
R
+ 13 R
A C L
19 30 27 acl
Ctrl + è
T T E
14 14 12 tte
SP
44 Space
K
+ 26 K
Ä S E
41 20 12 Cheese
Control printout: Raclètte cheese
7 - 14 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.7 Overview of scrolling messages

Define scrolling message text
- Define in Pr 202 Pr202
Select 202 01
Scrolling message for text number input Pr202

02
01-99
l
Press <Enter> key. C 500 LI H- 7
Scrolling message for text input,

e.g.
”&Z, You are being served by &B04; Mr. Müller”
For text input, see page 7 - 10.
Control characters:
- &Z;= Display character-by-character
- &W;= Display word-by-word (standard)
- &Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)
- &Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)
_______________________________________________________________________
To control the text, the control characters must be entered in
front of the text and concluded with a <; > semicolon. The
control characters can be entered at any point between the text.
_______________________________________________________________________
Scrolling message
Menu setting
- Pr 516/ 01 -01 Select scrolling text number.
- Pr 516/ 02 -2 Select display location e.g. 2= Scrolling message on operator
and customer side
or
- Pr 516/ 02 -1 Select display location e. g. 1= Scrolling message on operator
side
or
- Pr 516/ 02 -0 Select display location e. g. 0= Scrolling message on
customer side
- Pr 516/ 03 -1 Scrolling message starts with empty display
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 15
Barcode
7.8 Barcode overview
Procedure:
1. Create barcode structure
- Pr 210 Enter structure number

- Pr 210/ 01 Define barcode format (EAN 13, code 128 or EAN 8)
- Pr 210/ 02 Enter constant
- Pr 210/03 Define numeric value

_______________________________________________________________________
If several numeric values are defined for a barcode, Menu Pr
7 210/ 03 must be called up again for each value. Only press
numeric key <3> and confirm with <Enter>.
_______________________________________________________________________
- Pr 210/ 03 Define another numeric value
- Pr210/ 04 Save structure
Example
Structure number (Pr 210), code format (Pr 210/ 01) and constant ( Pr 210/ 02) are
entered.
Further operating procedure for numeric value input:
Pr210
Confirm submenu 03
03 01040
Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 01040 (price)
Pr210
Confirm input 04
Submenu 4 is displayed
Pr210
Presskey <3>
03
Select submenu 03 again
Pr210
Confirm submenu 03
03 12030
Enter numeric value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 12030 (department no.)
Pr210
Confirm input
04
l
Confirm submenu 04
04 C 291 L11 H-
Save code structure
The code structure is checked and adopted if valid.
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure
must be re-entered from the beginning.
7 - 16 6.111.98.5.01.18
Manufacturer code EAN 13
2. Release barcode printing
Ticket
- Pr 550/ 01 Release barcode print on ticket for product, total and talon.
- Pr 550/ 02 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.
Label
- Pr 555/ 06 Release barcode print on label for article, total.
- Pr 555/ 07 Define barcode height 5-22 mm.
3. Allocate barcode
The barcode can be produced for the following data:
Articles not saved in the scales:
- Non-PLU weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 215/02 7
- Non-PLU non-weighed articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/03
- Non-PLU minus articles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215/ 04
- Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 /05
Articles saved in the scales:

- Article (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 110/PLU no./ 05
- For all articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211/ 03
Barcode types:
Manufacturer code EAN 13 see page 7 - 18
The manufacturer barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the
article, e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04.
Instore EAN 13 / EAN 8 see page 7 - 20
A code structure must be created for EAN 13 and EAN 8. Create in Pr 210.
Th code structure number from Pr210 is e.g. assigned to an articele in Pr110/PLU no/05 or
all articles in Pr 211 /03.
The EAN 13 printout has 13 digits (12 digits for information and one check digit)
The EAN 8 printout has 8 digits (7 digits for information and one check digit)
Code 128 see page 7 - 26
A code structure must be defined for code 128. Creation in Pr210.
The code structure number from Pr210 is, e.g., assigned to an article in Pr110/05 or to all
articles in Pr211 /03.
The code 128 printout can be any width. The barcode is limited by the possible printing
area.
Manufacturer code EAN 8 see page 7 - 19
The manufacturer barcode is entered with 13 digits. The code is directly assigned to the
article, e.g. in Pr 110/ 05 or Pr 215/ 02, 03, 04.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 17
13 digits have to be entered for the EAN 13 manufacturer code.
Enter numbers 1400151300062.
The first digit 1 identifies the entry as 1 2

the manufacturer code and is not printed.
Pr110
1 Code digit for code format
05 1 400151300062
1= manufacturer code
Fig. 63: Entering the manufacturer code
7
The following 12 digits are converted into

a barcode and are printed as they are
entered 2 .
The last digit is a check digit created by
the scale 3 .
2 3
Fig. 64: Print manufacturer code
_______________________________________________________________________
There are different types of barcode. One of the most common
barcodes is the 13-digit code for consumer articles. The following
example shows how the barcode is broken down:
Manufacturer Article number Check digit

Country digit
number
- The country digit indicates in which country a manufacturer has
applied for the barcode. The numbers 400 to 440, for example,
stand for Germany.
- The manufacturer number provides information on the producer
and is issued by GS1 Germany.
- The article number is specified by the manufacturer. Each article
has its own number and can therefore be identified worldwide.
- The check digit is a number that has been calculated from all the
other digits. It helps to avoid reading errors in the scanner.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 18 6.111.98.5.01.18
8 digits have to be entered for the EAN 13 manufacturer code.
1st digit = code format
Digits 2 to 8 = barcode digits
Digits 9 to 13 = fill with zeros.
Enter numbers 2400151200000.
The first digit 1 identifies the entry as 1 2

the manufacturer code and is not printed.
Pr110
1 Code digit for code format 05 2 400151200000
2= Manufacturer code EAN 8 7
Fig. 65: Entering the manufacturer code
The following 7 digits are converted into a

barcode and are printed as they are
entered 2 .
The last digit is a check digit created by
the scale 3 .
2 3
Fig. 66: Printout manufacturer code EAN 8
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 19
Instore code EAN 13

Instore code EAN 13
A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code.
The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales. The number
of digits per field is also defined in the structure.
Menu setting
- Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03 Create structure
- Pr 210/ 04 Check and save structure
12 digits must be defined for EAN 13.
The number of available 12 digits is divided into fields in the barcode structure. Each field
can be set individually in Pr210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03. The fields are counted from left to
7 right.
_______________________________________________________________________
Several encoded values (fields) can be set in a row, to do so
re-access submenu 02 or 03 .
The number of digits in all fields must be exactly 12.
If this is more or less, the structure is rejected.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 20 6.111.98.5.01.18
Instore code EAN 13
Example: Code structure for in-store code EAN 13 with 3 fields
12 digits are available for printing. The 13th digit is a check number from the scale.
1 2 3 7
Fig. 67: Code digit (Field 1), Substring/Constant (Field 2), Selling Price (Field 3)
Menu Input example Note Printing in field
Pr 210 02 Code structure number Use this structure
number in Pr 110/
PLU no./ 05 or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05
Pr 210/ 01 00002 Code EAN 13 with OCR
Pr 210/ 02 22 Code digit for price Field 1 (code digit)
2 Digits
Pr 210/ 03 05040 Substring/Constant Enter field 2 (sub‐
4 Digits string) in
Pr 110/ PLU-No./
05 or
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05
Pr 210/ 03 01060 Selling price Field 3 (Price)
6 Digits
Pr 210/ 04 Check and save struc‐
ture
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 21
Instore code EAN 13
Example:
Create barcode structure in Pr210
The following in-store barcode is to be printed:
Code digits price in Euro (22), substring from PLU (0815), price (total).
1 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02 Pr210
02
1
Define barcode format
Submenu 01 Pr210
2 Barcode types 01 10002
0= EAN 13; 1= code 128; 2= EAN 8
7 3 Height of barcode
2 3 4 5
00= Barcode height is taken from PR550/02, Pr555/07 or from BLD layout.
4 OCR line
0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.
5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel
Define code digits (Field 1)

Submenu 02 (code constant) 5
5 e.g. 22 for price code in Euro according to 22
GS1 Germany
02 C 18 LI H-
Define substring (Field 2)

Submenu 03 (numeric code) Pr210
6 Numeric code 03 05040
05= Substring from e.g. 110/05 (PLU):
or 215/ 02 (Non-PLU weighed) 6 7 8
or 215/ 03 (Non-weighed articles)

or 215/ 04 (Minus articles)
or 215/ 05 (Total)
7 Number of digits for field 2
04= four digits for constant
0=If in ”Numeric code” <05>= part string was selected, <0> must always be enetered
for the ”conversion of the variable values”.
7 - 22 6.111.98.5.01.18
Instore code EAN 13

Define price barcode (Field 3)
Submenu 03 (Numeric code) Pr210
9 Numeric code (encoded value) 03 01060
01= price
9 10 11
10 Number of digits for field 3
06= 6 digits for the price
0= Decimal places as per device setting
Check and adopt code structure
Confirm submenu 04
Pr210
7
confirm 04 C 302 L11 H-
Assign instore code code structure e.g in Pr 215/ 05 (total)

12 Code digit for barcode type 12 13 14 15
0= Instore code
Pr215
13 Barcode structure no. e.g. 02
05 0 02 0815000000
The code structure is saved in Pr 210 under
this number.
14 Constant is freely selectable
e.g. 4-digit article no. ”0815”
The number of digits depends on the
number of digits for the part string 7 .
15 The remaining digits are without meaning,
but must be assigned.
Input: ”000000”
16 Scale check digit
5 14 15 16
Fig. 68: Printout example for instore code

EAN 13
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 23
Instore code EAN 13
Example: Pr110
In-store code for a PLU no. 05 0 02 0815 000000
Printing of the barcode depends on the setting in the barcode structure.
6-digit coded value without check digit
5 Field 1: 2 digits for code constant

e.g. 22 for price code in Euro
7 Field 2: 4 digits for part string
7 e.g. article number 0815
10 Field 3: 6 digits for coded value 5 7 10 16
e.g. price 0022, 14€
Fig. 69: Example of EAN 13 in-store code

without check digit
5 digit coded value with check digit
5 Field 1: 2 digits for code constant

e.g. 22 for price code in Euro
7 Field 2: 4 digits for part string
e.g. article number 0815
17 Field 3:1 digit check digit
for encoded value 7 17 10 16
5
10 Field 4: 5 digits for coded value
e.g. price 022, 14€
Fig. 70: Example of EAN 13 in-store code

with check digit
7 - 24 6.111.98.5.01.18
Instore code EAN 8
Instore code EAN 8
A barcode structure must be defined for the instore code EAN 8.
The barcode structure also defines which values are applied from the scales.
Menu setting
- Pr 210 /structure number/ 01,02, 03 Create structure
- Pr 210/ 04 Check and save structure
7 digits must be defined for EAN 8.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of digits in the structure must be exactly 7.
If there are more or less, the structure is rejected. 7
_______________________________________________________________________
Example: Code structure for instore code EAN 8
There are 7 digits available for printing. The 8th digit is a check digit from the scale.
1 Code digit for price

2 Selling price
3 Scale check digit
1 2 3
Fig. 71: Instore code EAN 8

Menu Input example Note
Pr 210 02 Code structure number to be used in
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 05
or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02 Non-PLU weighed
Pr 215/ 03 Non-PLU non-weighed
articles
Pr 215/ 04 Non-PLU minus articles
Pr 215/ 05 Total
Pr 210/ 01 20002 Code EAN 8 with OCR
Pr 210/ 02 21 Code digit for price
2 Digits
Pr 210/ 03 01050 Selling price
5 Digits
Pr 210/ 04 Check and save structure
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 25
Code 128
Code 128
Code 128 contains the information in the dashes and spaces. The dash widths and the
width of the spaces vary, depending on the code content.
ASCII characters from ASCII 0 to ASCII 127 can be represented. This includes the
character set A, B and C. The specifications of code 128 can be found in Directive EN
799.
The length of the code is variable.
Menu setting
- Pr 210/ structure number/ 01, 02, 03 Create code
- Pr 210/ 04 Check digit and save if valid
7 The structure of Code 128 is defined in Pr 210/ 02 and Pr 210/ 03.
The code constant is defined in Pr 210/ 02.
The encoded values are selected in Pr 210/ 03, see page 7 - 62.
_______________________________________________________________________
Several encoded values can be set in a row, to do so re-call
submenu 02 or 03.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 26 6.111.98.5.01.18
Code 128
Example: Code structure for code 128 with 6 fields
Any number of fields
7
1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 72: Text (Field 1), Selling price (Field 2), PLU no. (Field 3), Weight (Field 4), Unit price
(Field 5), Department number (Field 6)
Menu Input example Note Printing in field
Pr 210 10 Code structure number Use this structure
number in Pr 110/
05 or
Pr 211/ 03
Pr 215/ 02
Pr 215/ 03
Pr 215/ 04
Pr 215/ 05
Pr 210/ 01 1000 Code 128 with OCR
Pr 210/ 02 ABCD Code constant Field 1 (Text)
Pr 210/ 03 01040 Selling price Field 2
with4 digits (Selling price)
Pr 210/ 03 06040 PLU no. field 3 (PLU no)
with4 digits
Pr 210/ 03 02040 Weight Field 4 (Weight)
with4 digits
Pr 210/ 03 08040 Unit price Field 5 (Unit price)
with4 digits
Pr 210/ 03 12030 Department number Field 6 (Dept. no.)
with3 digits
Pr 210/ 04 Check and save struc‐
ture
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 27
Code 128
Enter the code structure no. e.g. 10 after menu Pr 210

access 10
Pr210
Confirm code structure no.
01
Confirm submenu 01
Pr210
Enter barcode format, e.g. 1000 01 1000
Pr210
7 Confirm barcode format
02
Confirm submenu 02
ABCDEF
Enter code constant, e.g. ABCDEF 02 C 14 LI H-
Pr210
Confirm constant
03
Pr210
Confirm submenu 03
03 01040
Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 01040 (price)
Pr210
Confirm input 04
Select submenu 03 again
Pr210
Press <3>
03
Pr210
Confirm submenu 03
03 12030
Enter coded value, number of digits and conversion
e.g. 12030 (department no.)
Pr210
Confirm input 04
l
Confirm submenu 04
04 C 291 L11 H-
Confirm input
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code structure
must be re-entered from the beginning.
7 - 28 6.111.98.5.01.18
Code 128
Example:
Create structure for barcode 128 in Pr 210
The following barcode is to be printed:
Text, price, PLU no., weight, unit price, department no..
1 Barcode no. e.g. 10 Pr210
10
1
Define barcode format
Submenu 01 Pr210
2 Barcode types 01 10002
1= Code 128; 0= EAN 13; 2= EAN 8
2 3 4 5 7
3 Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from Pr550/02 or Pr555/07.
4 OCR line
0= OCR line is printed;1 = OCR line is not printed.
5 Module width e.g.: 2 Pixel
5
Enter text (Field 1)
Submenu 02 (code constant) ABCD
5 e.g. ABCD 02 C 16 LI H-
Price (Field 2)
Submenu 03 (Numeric code) Pr210
01= price
6 7 8
7 Number of digits for price
04= four digits for price
PLU no. (Field 3)

06= PLU no.
6 7 8
7 Number of digit for PLU no.
04= four digits for PLU no.
0= as per device setting
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 29
Code 128
Weight (Field 4)
02= Weight
6 7 8
7 Number of digits for weight
04= four digits for weight
Unit price (Field 5)

7 Submenu 03 (numeric code) Pr210
08= Unit price
6 7 8
7 Number of digits for unit price
04= four digits for unit price
Department no. (Field 6)

12= Department number
6 7 8
7 Number of digits for department number
03= three digits for department number
Check and adopt code

Confirm submenu 04
Pr210
confirm 04 C 115 L19 H-
7 - 30 6.111.98.5.01.18
Code 128
Assign barcode e.g. in Pr 110/PLU no./ 05
12 Code digit for barcode type 12 13 15
0= Instore code
Pr110
13 Barcode no e.g. 10
05 0 10 0000000000
The structure of Code 128 in Pr 210 is saved
under this number.
15 Part string in example not used. Therefore
the remaining digits are without meaning.
Input: ”0000000000”
16 Scale check digit 7
1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 73: Example of Code 128 with 6 fields
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 31
7.9 Traceability marker

Traceability text
Information about the origin of a product e.g. beef is is entered into
Pr 110/PLU number (9900 to 9999)/ 10.
The PLU number 9900 equals traceability number 00. PLU number 9902 equals origin
number 02 etc.
The traceability text is saved under the manufacturer number, which is printed in addition
to the PLU text.
1 Traceability text
2 PLU text
7 2
Fig. 74: Traceability text

Traceability no.
The traceability number is allocated to a product in during the sale.
There are 2 types of allocation:
1. Manual input of traceability number when a PLU is called up.
2. Automatic traceability no.
Program traceability data for manual input

- Create text of origin
Pr110/PLU number (9900- 9999)/ 10
- Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-1999)/ 09 -1
1= with data of origin
- Setting traceability marker
Pr 515/03 -1
1= manual traceability marker,
Program traceability data for automatic traceability number

- Create text of origin
Pr110/PLU number (9901-9999)/ 10
- Accept data of origin Pr110/ PLU number (0001-9999)/ 09 -1
- Setting traceability marker
Pr 515/03 -2
2= automatic traceability marker,
- Define automatic traceability no.
PR515/04 -01 (01-99)
7 - 32 6.111.98.5.01.18
By-Count
7.10 Overview of By Count article definition
By Count articles are piece goods in a package. The number of pieces per package is
defined.
By Count and fixed weight database configuration

The By Count article type must be started up with Pr 606.
_______________________________________________________________________
All article data are deleted during setting database
configuration.
Back up your data before database configuration. 7
_______________________________________________________________________
Menu setting
- Pr 606/ 07 -11xx By Count and fixed weight on.
- Pr 606/ 08 - 81 Start database configuration
The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.
By Count piece goods

General settings
Menu setting
- Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.
or
- Pr 515/ 07 -1 Mandatory input number of pieces for all By Count piece
goods
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 33
By-Count
Create By Count piece goods in a PLU
The selling price per package refers to the unit price and the set number of pieces per
package.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ 07 -3 By Count piece good type
The price per piece is also to be printed. If back calculation is activated, the price per
piece is determined and additionally printed.
7 Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -0 Without back calculation
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./15 -1 Wit back calculation The price per piece is
back-calculated from the package unit price and the number of pieces.
The number of pieces must always be entered for the called By Count article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of pieces
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -1 With mandatory input number of pieces
Overwriting the selling price must be permitted in sales.

Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -0 Without price overwriting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./6 -1 With price overwriting
7 - 34 6.111.98.5.01.18
Fixed weight
7.11 Create overview of fixed weight

The stored fixed weight for the article is used for the price calculation instead of the
weighed weight.
Fixed weight
General settings
Menu setting
- Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.
or
- Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles
7
Define fixed weight in a PLU
Menu setting
- Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 Unit price input (price per fixed weight)
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 08 -1 Unit price referring to 100g or 1/4 Lib

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called product in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weight
or
Overwriting the unit price should be permitted in sales.

Menu setting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 35
7.12 Overview of By Count fixed weight

In the case of By Count fixed weight, By Count articles are sold with fixed weight.
General settings
Menu setting
Mandatory input of fixed weight
- Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input fixed weight from PLU 110/PLU no./ 19.
or
- Pr 515/ 08 -1 Mandatory input for all fixed weight articles
7 Mandatory entry of quantity

- Pr 515/ 08 -0 Mandatory input number of pieces from PLU 110/PLU no./ 16.
or
- Pr 515/ 07 -1 Piece Mandatory input for all By Count articles
Define By Count fixed weight in a PLU

Menu setting
or
- Pr 110/ 08 -1 Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 Lib

The fixed weight should always be entered for the called article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./19 -0 Without mandatory input Fixed weight
or
The number of pieces must always be entered for the called article in sales.
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU no./16 -0 Without mandatory input number of pieces
or
Overwriting the package price must be permitted in sales.

Menu setting
or
- Pr 110/ PLU no./ 06 -1 With price overwriting
7 - 36 6.111.98.5.01.18
VAT
7.13 Overview VAT
VAT only for ticket and multi-user operation.
If you define the VAT on the scale, please proceed as follows:
1. Switch on VAT in setting into operation, see page 7 - 145.

Pr606/ 07 -111 VAT on
Pr606/ 88 - 81 The values set are adopted.
Re-programming of paper and mode settings (Pr510) necessary.
2. Print incl. VAT yes/no, see page 7 - 99. 7

Pr520/ 10 -1 Print
Pr520/ 10 -0 No print
3. Create VAT rates 1 to 5, see page 7 - 72.

Pr230 VAT number 1-5
Pr230/ 01 Define VAT rate
Pr230/ 02 0= VAT incl.
1= VAT excl.
Pr230/ 03 VAT text
4. A VAT number for all articles yes/no, see page 7 - 74.

Pr231/ 03 0= Use VAT from article
1-5 = Use a VAT for all articles
If a VAT number (1-5) is assigned to all articles, the VAT from article is ignored.
Overwriting is not possible.
5. Assign VAT to articles, see page 7 - 51.

Pr110/ PLU-Nr./ 20 VAT number 1-5
Pr110/PLU-Nr ./ 21 - 1 The VAT can be overwritten.
Pr215/ 09 VAT number 1-5 for Non-PLU weighed articles
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 37
VAT
7.13.1 Assign VAT to PLU
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07 VAT is activated
- Pr 230 The VAT rate is created
- Pr 231/ 03 -0 The VAT is used from PLU
Pr
Call up menu
Select menu Pr110

7 The PLU number is displayed. 000001
confirm
Pr110
Select submenu 20
Pr110
Confirm 20 1
Pr110
Enter VAT number
20 2
Confirm
The VAT rate from the VAT number 2 has now been assigned to PLU1.
Pr110
Submenu 21 is displayed.
21
confirm
Pr110
<1> press 21 1
The VAT in PLU can now be overwritten with a different VAT, see page 6 - 29.
Exit menu
7 - 38 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.14 Continuous operation in system (as of program version 2.00)

Up to 6 devices can be connected in a scale network (system). Two scales can be
connected directly via the EDP connector. Several scales are connected with a switch.
For scales with a 30 kg weighing range, please ask your Bizerba consultant.
Continuous operation in system possible. With Continuous operation a ticket can be
transmitted to any scale and printed in multi-operator mode. Data maintenance is also
possible.
Process Continuous operation

Registration is done on a scale. Further registrations by the same operator can be done
on all scales within the system. With key <Total> and operator key, e. g. <OP1> the ticket
can be closed on any scale on the system. The items and the total are then printed. 7
The following must be observed during continuous operation:
Prerequisite
- All scales must run on the same program version (Pr 716 / 09).
- All scales must be equipped with a dot-seven display.
Menu setting
- The Database configuration (Pr 606) must be set equally on all scales.
- Each scale within the scale must have an own network IP address (Pr 600)
- All scales need to have the same Multicast address (Pr 607/ 02).
- All scales need to have the same port number
( Pr 607/ 03 ) ( Pr 607/ 04 ).
- One scale must be set as master scale (Pr 607/ 01 - 9).
Only one scale must be set as master.
- The other scales need to be set as slaves (Pr 607/ 01 - 1).
- The operating mode must be set to multi-operator mode (510 /01 - 01).
_______________________________________________________________________
Scales in multi-operator and price labeling mode participate in
master data supply (Pr510 01). Continuous operation cannot be run
on scales in price labeling mode.
Continuous operation is only supported in operating mode
multi-operator .
Master data maintenance only possible on master scale.
Sales can only be viewed, printed and deleted on the master scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 39
System set-up
During system set-up, e.g. when switching on the scales, the slave scales show the
current system condition as scrolling message. The scales cannot be operated during this
time.
System conditions with slave scales

If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling
message on the display.
- ”Scale Network off”
Scale not entered in system yet.
- ”Scale Update”
7 Update of system data running.
- If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master
data from master scale are stored.
_______________________________________________________________________
It is absolutely necessary that you wait until all scales have
been entered into the system.
If one of the above mentioned messages appear on the display of a
slave scale and sales is continued on the other scales at the same time,
synchronization of this slave scale is re-started, this means a scale
update is started again.
This functionality may cause that the respective slave scales can no
longer be integrated in the system network.
_______________________________________________________________________
System identification
If a device has been entered into the system,
the arrow 1 flashes in the display . 1
- Arrow flashes = Slave scale in system. 0,000 0,00 0,00
- Arrow flashes every second= master scale in system.
- Arrow is dark = stand-alone scale.
7 - 40 6.111.98.5.01.18
Take scale out of a system

A scale in the system is to run as a single scale.
+ Press<Ctrl> and hold pressed,

then press <Up arrow>. 1
”WAIT” appears on the display
0,000 0,00 0,00
and the scale starts booting.
_______________________________________________________________________
Sales data and ticket memory are deleted. 7
_______________________________________________________________________
The scale can be operated as stand-alone scale.
If the scale is to be integrated in the system again, switch on and off scale again.
The sales data and the ticket memory are cleared and overwritten with the system network
data.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 41
Article maintenance 1--
7.15 Article maintenance menu Pr 1--
Define, edit or delete article (PLU).
Up to 6000 products (PLU) can be defined.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of products (PLU) depends on the settings in memory
management Pr 606. Standard setting is 2000 PLU.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Define PLU Pr 110
7 Print article (PLU) lists Pr 115
Delete article individually Pr 120
Delete article from to Pr 121
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 42 6.111.98.5.01.18
Article maintenance Pr 1--
7.15.1 Defining PLU (article) .................................................... Pr 110
All data related to an article is saved in the PLU no., e.g. text, basic price, tare, etc.
Select 110
Pr110
confirm
PLU product
The menu text is displayed
7
confirm
Index
Enter PLU number (1 to 6000) _____9
confirm
Scroll in submenu using arrow Price

keys. 01
confirm
Pr 110 Submenu overview:

01= Unit price
02= Product group
03= Tare
04= Shelf-life days
05= Barcode
06= Price overwriting
07= Article type
08= Weight class
09= Data of origin
10= PLU article text
11= Supplementary text 1 - 4
12= Supplementary text 1 - 10 for BLD text fields
13= Logo print in BLD logo fields 1-3
14= Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes
15= Unit price back calculation for the By Count operating modes
16= Mandatory input of pieces
17= Fixed weight
18= Fixed weight mode
19= Mandatory input of fixed weight
20= VAT number
21= VAT can be overwritten
22= Tare % (percentage tare)
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 43
Unit price input
_______________________________________________________________________
The price/kg depends on the entered unit price (110/PLU no./01)
and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08).
_______________________________________________________________________
Example:
Weight class Unit price input Price/kg
1kg 25.80 25.80
100g 25.80 258.00
7
Submenu 01 Pr110
Enter unit price 01 0025,80
save
Product group
Submenu 02 Pr110
Enter product group 02 0001
0000-9999 product groups are possible.
save
Tare
Submenu 03 Pr110
Enter tare in gram 03 0,002
save
_______________________________________________________________________
Article tare is country-dependent.

_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 44 6.111.98.5.01.18
Sell-by date
The sell-by date is only printed on labels.
If entry is smaller than 900 (< 900), the text ”best before” is printed on the label.
With entry 900 the text ”use by” instead of ”best before” is printed,
e.g. for minced meat the packaged on date and the use-by date would then be the same.
With an input of 901, the use-by date is 1 day later than the packaged on date, etc..
The shelf life days are added to the packaged on date. The resulting sell-by date is
printed. If ”000” is entered, no sell-by date is printed.
Submenu 04 Pr110
Enter shelf-life 04 900
Shelf-life t 900 = Print sell-by date 7
Shelf-life y 900 = Print use-by date
save
Barcode for article

Prerequisite
for printing the barcode, see page 7 - 16
Submenu 05
Enter 13 digits for barcode Pr110
05 0010815000000
save
1 2 3 4
1 0= Instore code (EAN 13, EAN 8 or code 128)
1= Manufacturer code EAN 13
2 Code structure number
3 Substring (free entry) is defined in Pr 210/
03
4 The in-store code must be filled with
000000.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 45
Overwriting the price
The stored unit price for an article can be changed in sales (overwritten), see page 6 - 17.
Submenu 06 Pr110
Enter selection 06 0
0= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted
1= Overwriting a unit price is not permitted
save
7
Article type
Submenu 07
Enter article type Pr110
07 0
save
Product types
0= weighed - The selling price of an article is calculated from the weight.
1= non weighed - The price does not depend on the weight. The selling price of the article
is the entered unit price.
2= minus - The unit price of the article is a minus amount in sales, e.g. for
deposit on bottles.
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07 -11 Allow By Count and fixed weight
or
- Pr 606/ 07 -10 Allow By Count only
or
- Pr 606/ 07 -01 Allow fixed weight only
- Pr 606/ 08 -81 Start commissioning

The settings in Pr 606/ 07 are adopted.
_______________________________________________________________________
All article data are deleted during commissioning.
Back up your data before commissioning.
_______________________________________________________________________
3= By Count - the price relates to pieces per package.

4 = Fixed weight
5=By Count fixed weight - fixed weight and price relate to pieces per package
7 - 46 6.111.98.5.01.18
Weight class
_______________________________________________________________________
The price/kg depends on the entered unit price (110/PLU no./01)
and the set weight class (110/PLU no./08).
_______________________________________________________________________
Submenu 08 Pr110
Enter weight class 08 0
0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb depending on country option
1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb depending on country option
7
save
Data of origin
Data of origin can be allocated to a PLU no.
Prerequisite
- Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 10
The data, e.g. birth, slaughter, cutting, etc. has to be defined, PLU no. 9900 - 9999,
see page 7 - 32.
Submenu 09 Pr110
0= without data of origin
save
PLU article text

Submenu 10 Pr110
Enter article text 10 C 500 LI H-
Example:
S A L A M I
20 19 27 19 34 17 Enter PLU article text, see also page7 - 10.
Start test print

”salami” is printed
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 47
Supplementary text 1-4
Prerequisite
Ticket
- Pr 550/ 13 -1 Release print of supplementary texts.
Label
- Pr 555/ 16 -______1 Release print of supplementary texts.
1 to 4 supplementary texts can be printed in addition to the PLU article text.
The supplementary texts have to be available in Pr 200.
Pr110
7 Submenu 11 11 _-_________
Pr110
Enter 1, 2, 3 or 4 11 1-000000000
Pr110
confirm 11 1-_________
Enter text number Pr110

from Pr 200 11 1-______ 101
confirm
Supplementary text 1-10 for BLD text fields

BLD= Bizerba Label Designer
Graphic tool for the innovative design of label layouts.
In the design of labels in BLD, different text fields can be defined.
A text from Pr 200 can allocated to these text fields in the scales.
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 01 -00 Label layout from BLD.
- Pr 555/02 -09 select BLD label number
- Pr 606/ 03 -0 to 10 Release BLD text fields
Submenu 12 Pr110
12 __-_________
Enter text feld number Pr110
1-10 12 01-000000000
confirm
Pr110
Enter text number from Pr200 12 01- 000000101
confirm
The text no. 101 in Pr 200 is allocated to text field 1.
7 - 48 6.111.98.5.01.18
Logo print in BLD logo fields
Graphic fields can be defined in BLD for label design.
A logo can be allocated to these graphic fields in the scales.
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 01 -00 Label layout from BLD.
- Pr 555/ 02 -01.... Select BLD label.
- Pr 606/ 04 -0 to 3 Release BLD logo fields
Pr110
Submenu 13 13 _-____
7
Pr110
Enter logo field number 13 1-____
1-3
confirm
Pr110
Enter logo ID 13 1-___ 7
confirm
In logo field 1, the logo with ID 0007 is being printed.
By Count: Pieces per package

Submenu 14
Menu setting
- Pr 110/ PLU-no../ 07 -3 Article type By Count
Enter number of pieces Pr110

00-99 pieces per package are possible. 14 12
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 49
Unit price back-calculation for By Count and fixed weight
Submenu 15 Pr110
0= Without back calculation
1= With back calculation
The unit price per piece or the fixed weight per kg is calculated.
save
7 By-Count: Mandatory input of pieces

Submenu 16 Pr110
0= No mandatory input
1= with mandatory input
save
The number of pieces per package must always be entered in the sale.
By-Count: Fixed weight

Submenu 17 Pr110
Enter fixed weight for a package 17 000560
000000 - 999999
save
By-Count: Fixed weight mode

Submenu 18 Pr110
Enter mode 18 0
0= Standard
1= lboz (g)
2= oz (lboz)
3= oz (g)
4= oz (lb)
save
A second representation of the unit is printed in brackets.
7 - 50 6.111.98.5.01.18
Mandatory input of fixed weight
Submenu 19 Pr110
0= No mandatory input
save
The fixed weight must always be entered in sales.
VAT number 7
Submenu 20
Prerequisite
- Pr 230 VAT rate has been defined
- Pr 231/ 03 -0 VAT rate as of PLU is used
Enter VAT number Pr110

1-5 = VAT number 20 1
save
The selling price of the selected PLU is calculated with the entered VAT.
Overwriteable VAT
also see page 6 - 29
Submenu 21
Prerequisite
- Pr 230 VAT rate has been defined
- Pr 630 A VAT key has been created
- Pr631/ 03 reprogrammed keyboard is set
Enter selection Pr110

0= VAT cannot be overwritten 21 1
1= VAT can be overwritten
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 51
Tare % (dependent on country)
If tare % is entered, the tare value increases in parallel to total weight in percent. If e.g. a
PLU tare is entered, it is added to percent tare. The total tare is deducted from total
weight. Only the net weight is caluclated.
Example: An article has a PLU tare of 2 grams and a percent tare of 10%.
If the article has a weight of 1000 grams the 2g PLU tare + 10% percent tare are
deducted. The display shows the tare weight of 102 g and the net weight of 898g.
If the same article has a weight of 1500g the display shows a tare weight of 152g and a
net weight of 1348g.
7 Submenu 22
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/ 07 Permit tare %
Enter the tare % for the PLU Pr110

22 000,00
save
7 - 52 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.15.2 Print PLU (article) lists .................................................... Pr115

Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 5.
Print all PLUs Pr115

Select 115
Print PLU list

The menu text is displayed.
confirm
Print PLU list 7
01
Scroll in submenu using arrow keys.
Print PLU list

confirm 01 000001-999999
confirm
All programmed PLUs are printed.
Printing PLU selection
Submenu 01 and 02 Pr115

Enter submenu 01
01= Print PLU selection with all article lines
02= Print PLU selection with first article line only
Pr115
confirm 01 000001-999999
Pr115
Enter start PLU no. 01 _____1-999999
Pr115
Confirm start PLU 01 000001-______
Pr115
Enter first PLU no. 01 000001-____ 12
Confirm the end PLU no. and start printing

PLU 1 to 12 are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 53
7.15.3 Deleting PLU (article) individually ................................... Pr 120
Select 120
confirm
Pr120
Enter article (PLU) number 000015
confirm
PLU 15 is deleted.
7
7.15.4 Deleting PLU (article) from - to ...................................... Pr 121
Select 121
confirm
Pr121
Enter start PLU no. _____1-000000
Pr121
confirm 000001-______
Pr121
Enter first PLU no. 000001-____ 10
delete
PLU 1 to 10 are deleted.
7 - 54 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16 Data management Menu Pr 2--
Define supplementary texts and allocate them to a text number.
Define barcode structure.
Make non-PLU settings. Non-PLU are products that are not stored in the scales.
_______________________________________________________________________
Creating supplementary texts Pr 200
Create header and footer texts Pr 201
Create scrolling message Pr 202
7
Print texts Pr 205
Delete texts Pr 206
Define barcode structure Pr 210
Print barcode structure Pr 211
Non-PLU settings Pr 215
BLD label list / print logo list Pr 220
Delete BLD labels / logos Pr 225
Define VAT Pr 230
Manage VAT Pr 231
_______________________________________________________________________
7.16.1 Creating supplementary texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 200
An arbitrary text is created and stored in Pr 200. Each text is given a text number. This text
number can, for example, be allocated to a PLU product.
500 text numbers may be defined.
Example: A supplementary text is saved in Pr 200 as text number 10.
This number is entered in Pr 110/ PLU no./ 11 so that this text will be printed in addition to
the PLU article text.
Select 200
confirm
Index
Enter text number _______10
confirm
Pr200
Enter text C 1500 LI H-
see page 7 - 10
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 55
Data management Pr 2--
7.16.2 Creating header and footer texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 201
In Pr 201 header and footer notes are created centrally. Each header and footer text is
saved under a text number.
A header or footer text is printed when one of these text numbers are entered at:
- Ticket in Pr 550/ 04 and 05.
- Labels in Pr 555/ 09.
Select 201
7 confirm
Index
Enter text number 10
1 - 99
confirm
I
Enter header or footer text C 500 LI H-
see page 7 - 10
confirm
7 - 56 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16.3 Defining scrolling message text ...................................... Pr 202
Select 202
confirm
Pr202
Enter text number 10
01 - 99
confirm
I 7
Enter scrolling message text C 500 LI H-
Text input, see page 7 - 10
confirm
The output can be changed with control characters:

- &Z;= Display character-by-character
- &W;= Display word-by-word (standard)
- &Bxx;= Allow text to flash (xx= 01-99 sec.)
- &Txx;= Waiting time for subsequent text (xx= 1-99 sec.)
Control characters can be entered in the text at will. The control character influences the
subsequent text. Always place a < ; > after the control character.
_______________________________________________________________________
Scrolling message settings for the scale in Pr 516.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 57
7.16.4 Printing texts .................................................................... Pr 205
Requirement
- Receipt paper is in the printer
- Pr 510/ 04 -0 Ticket paper type is set.
Overview of text and article lists, see page 7 - 6.

Select 205
7
confirm
Pr205
Enter submenu 01
01= Print supplementary texts

02= Print header and footer texts
03= Print scrolling message
Pr205
confirm 01 0
Start printing
The stored texts are printed.
7 - 58 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16.5 Deleting supplementary texts and header/footer texts . . . Pr 206
Select 206
confirm
Pr206
Enter submenu 01
01= Delete supplementary text from Pr 200 individually.
02= Delete all supplementary texts from Pr 200.
03= Delete single header and footer text from Pr 201.
04= Delete single scrolling message text from Pr 202.
7
confirm
Deleting supplementary text individually

Submenu 01 Pr206
Enter text number from Pr200 01 ______101
1-999999999
confirm
The text with text number 101 is deleted.
Deleting all supplementary texts

Submenu 02 Pr206
Enter 90 02 90
confirm
All supplementary texts in Pr 200 are deleted.
Deleting header and footer texts

Submenu 03 Pr206
Enter text number from Pr201 03 _2 - 00
confirm
Pr206
Enter text number from Pr201 03 02 - 15
confirm
Header and footer text with the text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 59
Deleting scrolling message texts
Submenu 04
01-99 Pr206
Enter text number from Pr202 04 _2 - 00
confirm
Pr206
Enter text number from Pr202 04 02 - 15
confirm
7 Scrolling message texts with text numbers 2 to 15 are deleted.
7 - 60 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16.6 Defining barcode structure .............................................. Pr 210

In Pr 210 the structure of the instore code EAN 13 and the code structure for code 128 is
created.
_______________________________________________________________________
Examples for
- Barcode structure code 128 see pge 7 - 26
- Barcode structure instore code EAN 13 see page 7 - 20.
_______________________________________________________________________
Structure for code 128, EAN 13 and EAN 8 7
Select 210
Confirm
Submenu
01= Define barcode format
02= Enter code constant
03= Select numeric code
04= Check code structure and save
Entering a structure number 1
01 - 99 Pr210
1 Structure number e.g. 02 02
Pr206
Confirm structure number
01
Confirm submenu
Defining barcode format Pr210

Submenu 01 01 10002
2 Barcode types 2 3 4 5
0= EAN13
1= Code 128
2= EAN 8
3 Height of barcode
00= Barcode height is taken from Pr
550/02 or Pr 555/07.
05 to 22 = Barcode height in mm
4 OCR line
0= OCR line is printed 3
1= OCR line is not printed
5 Module width 2 or 3 pixel
4
confirm
Fig. 75: Example with OCR line
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 61
Entering a code constant
Submenu 02
I
confirm
02 C 20 LI H-
Text and numeric input of up to 20 characters is possible for Code 128.
Text input see page 7 - 10
For EAN 13 and EAN 8, only numbers with up to 12 digits are possible.
confirm
7
Selecting numeric codes
Submenu 03 Pr210
confirm 03 01050
1 Encoded values
1 2 3
01= price
02= Weight
03= No. of pcs.
04= Foreign currency
05= Part string from PLU Starts at 4th position after code structure number.
06=PLU number
07= Middle check digit Enter 07000
Only for EAN 13. Middle check digit possible in pos. 6, 7 or 8.
08= Unit price
09= Foreign currency unit price
10= Tare
11= Device number, see Pr 605
12= Department number, see Pr 604
13= Operator no.
14= Scale number, see Pr 603
15= 313 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128
16= 131 Modulo 10 check digit for code 128
17= Encode ticket number
2 Number of digits
01 to 10 digits
7 - 62 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
1=Decimal places are cut off No rounding occurs.
2= There is a cutoff after the first decimal place. No rounding.
3= After the second decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.
4= After the third decimal place there is a cutoff. No rounding.
5= Floating comma only for EAN 13.
The code digit (e.g. 22 for price) is increased by the number of omitted digits. The
increased code digit means that during scanning of the barcode the number of
digits and position of the comma are established.
6= The value to be coded is multiplied by 10.
7= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 10.
8= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 100. 7
9= The value to be encoded is multiplied by 1000.
Brief example: Define code structures for EAN Code 13 (12 position necessary)
Pr 210 05 Define structure number, e.g. 05
Pr 210/ 01 00002 (EAN 13 with OCR)
Pr 210/ 02 21 Constant, e.g. 21 (2 positions)
Pr 210/ 03 06040 PLU number (4 positions)
Pr 210/ 03 07000 Middle check digit (1 position)
Pr 210/ 03 02050 Weight with 5 positions
Pr 210/ 04 <enter> Check and save structure
1 Constant 2 digits
2 PLU number 4-digits
3 Middle check digit, 1 position
4 Weight 5 digits
5 Automatic check digit from scale
1 2 3 4 5
Fig. 76: Example barcode
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 63
Checking and adopting code structure
Submenu 04
Pr210
confirm
04 C 337 LI H-
Checking code structure by printing out
+ <Press> shift and hold,

7 then<press> total
The entered code is printed.
Fig. 77: Print code structure
Checking code structure in display Decimals as configured

04 C 337 L8 H-
<Press scrolling.
The entered code is displayed line by line
confirm
If the code structure is not valid, an error signal can be heard. The code
structure must be re-entered from the beginning.
7 - 64 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16.7 Administering barcode structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 211
Select 211
confirm
Pr211
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7
01= Print code structures
02= Delete code structures
03= Code structure number for all PLU
04= Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position
05= Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position
Printing code structures

Submenu 01
Pr211
confirm 01 0
The saved barcode structures are printed
1 Structure number
2 Barcode format
3 Field 1 code constant
4 Content field 1 1
5 Field 2 part string from PLU 2
4
7 Field 3 price
5
9 Conversion of variable values 7 8 9
Fig. 78: Barcode structures

Deleting code structures
Submenu 02 Pr211
Enter first code number e.g. 1
02 _1-00
confirm Pr211
Enter code number., e.g. 10. 02 01- 10
confirm
Code numbers 1 to 10 are deleted.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 65
Code structure number for all PLUs

Submenu 03
The same barcode structure is assigned to all PLUs.
Pr211
Enter code number 03 11
00= Use code structure number from PLU Pr
110/ 05
01-99 = Code structure number is used for all
PLUs.
7 confirm
All products (PLU) are printed out with barcode structure no. 11.
The barcode structure is set in Pr 210.
Module width
Bars and spaces of a barcode have a standard pixel width. The readability of a rotated
barcode can be improved by using a larger pixel width.
Module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position

Submenu 04
Generally allocate module width for barcode in 0 and 180 position.
Pr211
Enter module width 04 0
0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).
2, 3= Generally use this module width. Ignore module width from code structure.
confirm
Module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position

Submenu 05
Generally allocate module width for barcode in 90 and 270 position.
Pr211
Enter module width 05 0
0, 1= Use module width from code structure (210/ 01).
2, 3= Generally use this module width. Ignore module width from code structure.
confirm
7 - 66 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16.8 Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215
Select 215
confirm
Pr215
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7
01= Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)
02= Barcode for non-PLU weighed articles
03= Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (sold by piece)
04= Barcode for non-PLU minus article
05= Barcode for total
06= Product group for non-PLU weighed
07= Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (sold by piece)
08= Barcode for non-PLU minus articles
09= VAT for non-PLU weighed
10= VAT for non-PLU non-weighed articles (sold by piece)
04= VAT for non-PLU minus articles
04= PLU number for non-PLU articles
Sell-by date for non-programmed articles (non-PLU)

Submenu 01
Prerequisite
- Pr 555/ 05 -01 or 11 Release print of sell-by date on label.
_______________________________________________________________________
Date representation depends on the setting in Pr 500/04.
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr215
Enter date 01 190508
e.g. 26.04.2007
If 1000000 is entered, no date is printed.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 67
Prerequisite
For ticket
- Pr 550/ 01 Release print of barcode
For labels
- Pr 555/ 06 Release print of barcode
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles

Submenu 02 Pr215
Enter 13 digits for the barcode 02 0000000000000
7 save
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece)

Submenu 03
Pr215
save
Barcode for non-PLU minus article

Submenu 04
Pr215
save
Barcode for total

Pr215
Submenu 05
05 0020000000000
Enter 13 digits for the barcode 1 2 3 4
save
1 0= Instore code (EAN 13, EAN 8 or code 128)
2 Code structure number
3 Substring (free entry)
The number of digits is dependent on the number of digits for the substring. The
number is defined in Pr 210/ 03.
4 The in-store code must be filled with
000000.
7 - 68 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
Product groups for non-PLU weighed products
Submenu 06
Pr215
0000-9999 Product groups are possible.
save
Product groups for non-PLU non-weighed products (sold by piece)
Submenu 07
7
Pr215
save
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles

Submenu 08
Pr215
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 69
VAT for Non-PLU weighed articles
Submenu 09
Pr215
Enter VAT number 09 1
1 - 5 VAT numbers are possible.
save
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods)

Submenu 10
7 Pr215
save
VAT for Non-PLU minus articles

Submenu 11
Pr215
save
PLU number for non-PLU articles

Submenu 99
Articles without PLU number are allocated to a general number.
All articles that are sold using the <Non-weighed> or <Minus> key, or by entering a unit
price are booked under this number.
These numbers occur in the sales report and the ticket journal.
Non-PLU non-weighed article = number (e.g.: 999997)
Non-PLU minus article = number+1 (e.g.: 999998)
Non-PLU weighed = number+2 (e.g.: 999999)
Pr215
Enter number range 99 999997
000001 - 999997 PLU numbers are possible.
If these numbers are modified, the PLUs within the selected number range will be deleted.
save
7 - 70 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
7.16.9 Printing BLD label list / logo list ...................................... Pr 220
Select 220
confirm
Pr220
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7
01= Print BLD label list
02= Print logo list
Printing BLD label list

Submenu 01
Pr220
01 0
confirm
The list of BLD labels stored in the scale is printed.
Printing logo list

Submenu 02
Pr220
02 0
confirm
The list of BLD logos stored in the scale is printed.
7.16.10 Deleting BLD labels / logos ............................................. Pr 225
Select 225
confirm
Pr225
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Delete BLD labels
02= Delete BLD logos
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 71
Deleting BLD labels
Submenu 01 Pr225
Enter BLD label no. 01 01-00
confirm
Pr225
Enter BLD label no. 01 01- 03
confirm
The selected labels are deleted.
7 Deleting BLD logos

Submenu 02 Pr225
Enter BLD logo ID 02 0001-0000
confirm
Pr225
Enter BLD logo ID 02 0001- 0003
confirm
The selected BLD logos are being deleted.
Example, see page 7 - 8
7.16.11 Defining VAT ..................................................................... Pr 230
Select 230
confirm
Pr230
Enter VAT number 1
1-5
confirm Pr230
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Define VAT rate
02= VAT inclusive or exclusive
03= VAT text
7 - 72 6.111.98.5.01.18
Data management 2--
Defining VAT rate
Submenu 01 Pr230
Enter VAT rate in %, e.g. 19% 01 19,00
0-99
confirm
VAT inclusive or exclusive

Submenu 02 Pr230 7
VAT inclusive or exclusive 02 0
0= VAT inclusive
1= VAT exclusive
confirm
VAT text
Submenu 03 19% inclusive
Enter text 03 C20 LI H-
confirm
The VAT rate is defined. Up to 5 different VAT rates can be defined.
Press Esc 230

<ESC> 2
The next VAT number is displayed.
Pr230
confirm 01
The next VAT rate (no. 2) can be defined.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 73
7.16.12 Managing VAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 231
Select 231
confirm
Pr231
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7 01= Print VAT data record list
02= Delete VAT number
03= General VAT
Printing VAT list

Submenu 01 Pr231
01 0
confirm
The list containing the defined VAT rates is printed.
Deleting VAT numbers

Submenu 02 Pr231
Enter VAT number 02 1-0
1 to 5
confirm
Pr231
Enter VAT number 02 1-3
1 to 5
confirm
The VAT number data records 1, 2 and 3 are deleted.
Same VAT for all articles

Submenu 03 Pr231
0= Use PLU and non-PLU VAT
1 - 5= Use same VAT for all articles
confirm
7 - 74 6.111.98.5.01.18
Reports Pr 3--
7.17 Reports menu Pr 3--
_______________________________________________________________________
Configure report layout Pr 300
Printing reports on ticket Pr 310
Printing report on label Pr 311
Displaying / deleting sales Pr 320
_______________________________________________________________________
7.17.1 Configuring report layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 300 7
Select 300
confirm
Pr 300
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Printout of prices
02= Printout of PLU without sales
03= Printout of customer name for PLU report (Pr 310/ 02 and 03)
04= Printout of customer name for product group report (Pr 310/ 04)
05= Printout of customer name for operator report (Pr 310/ 05)
06= Printout of customer name for scale total sales (Pr 311/ 01) and operator total sales
report (Pr 310/ 05)
07= Printout of customer name for data of origin report (Pr 310/ 06 and 07)
08= Printout of customer name for VAT report (Pr 310/ 05)
Printout of prices
Submenu 01 Pr 300
0= Prices are not printed
1= Prices are printed
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 75
Reports Pr 3--
Printout PLU without sales
Submenu 02 Pr 300
0= PLUs without sales are not printed
1= PLUs without sales are printed
confirm
Customer name for reports

7 Submenu 03 to 08
New report names (customer names) are created in Pr 201.
Allocate text number of a name to report, e.g.
03. Pr 300
Enter text number 03 01
01-99 Text number from Pr 201.
00 Print standard name.
confirm
7 - 76 6.111.98.5.01.18
Reports Pr 3--
7.17.2 Printing reports on ticket ................................................. Pr 310
The reports can either be printed or printed and deleted.

_______________________________________________________________________
Observe report layout configuration Pr 300, see page 7 - 75.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 310
7
confirm
Pr 310
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Scale report
02= PLU report with an article text line
03= PLU report with all article text lines
04= Product groups report
05= Operator report
06= Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data of origin
07= Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of origin
08= VAT sales report
Scales report
Submenu 01 Pr 310
0= Print report, no delete
1= Print and delete report
Start printing
Reports on PLU, operators, product groups and data of origin are printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 77
Reports Pr 3--
PLU report with one article text line
Submenu 02 Pr310
Start printing
PLU report with one article text line is printed.
7 PLU report with all article text lines

Submenu 03 Pr310
Start printing
The PLU report is being printed with all article text lines.
1 Unit price 11
2 Sales of this PLU
3 Number of canceled reports +1
If the number is 9, no. 8 reports have been
canceled. 10
1
4 PLU unit price overwritten *
9 2
5 Number of recordings
8 3
6 Sold quantity
7 Date and time of previous report
7 6 5 4
8 Product group
9 PLU number Fig. 79: PLU product report
10 PLU text
11 Date and time of current report
7 - 78 6.111.98.5.01.18
Reports Pr 3--
Product group report
Submenu 04 Pr310
04 0
Start printing
The product group report is printed.
1 Sales for this product group
2 Number of recordings
3 Sold quantity
4 Product group number
7
4
3 2 1
Fig. 80: Product group report
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 79
Reports Pr 3--
Operator report
Submenu 05 Pr310
Start printing
The operator report is being printed.
1 Sales of operator 1 7
7 2 Sales of operator 2
3 Operator total sales
4 Number of canceled reports +1
The operator report documents how often 1
scale sales have been deleted before the
current report.
If the number is 10, no. 9 reports have
been canceled.
5 Date and time of last report canceled 6
6 Operator no.
7 Date and time of current report 2
4
5
Fig. 81: Operator report
7 - 80 6.111.98.5.01.18
Reports Pr 3--
Sales by data of origin report providing one text line that contains data
of origin
Submenu 06 Pr310
Start printing
The sales by data of origin report is printed providing one text line that contains 7
data of origin.
Sales by data of origin report providing all text lines that contain data of
origin
Submenu 07 Pr310
Start printing
The sales by data of origin is printed providing all text line that contain data of
origin.
In the sales by data of origin report, the data of origin is printed with the number of sold
items and sold weight.
1 Number of sold items
2 sold weight
3 Text of origin
4 Data of origin no.
4 1
3 2
Fig. 82: Sales by data of origin report
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 81
Reports Pr 3--
VAT sales report

Submenu 08 Pr310
Start printing
The VAT sales report is printed.
1 VAT inclusive 6
7 2 VAT exclusive
5
3 VAT text
1
4 VAT rate 4
3
5 VAT number
Reporting period:
6 Date and time of current report
7 Date and time of previous report
Sales results obtained within the period
between the current report and the previous 2
report.
Fig.: 83: VAT sales report
7.17.3 Printing report on label ................................................... Pr 311
Select 311
Pr311
Start printing 0
The scale total sales are printed.
1
1 Scale number
2 Total sales of scale
3 Number of sales deletions
3 2
Fig. 84: Total sales report
7 - 82 6.111.98.5.01.18
Reports Pr 3--
7.17.4 Displaying / deleting sales .............................................. Pr 320
Select 320
confirm Pr320
Enter submenu 01
01= Display total sales of scale

02= Delete sales
confirm 7
Displaying sales
Submenu 01 Pr320
confirm 01 364,15
The scale total sales are displayed.
Deleting sales
Submenu 02
_______________________________________________________________________
The scale total sales are completely deleted!
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr320
Enter 90 02 90
confirm
The scale total sales are deleted.
The deletion is booked, see page 7 - 82.
Delete journal
Submenu 99
_______________________________________________________________________
Deleting ticket journal from device!
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr320
Enter 90 99 90
confirm
Deleting ticket journal from device
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 83
Configuration Pr 5--
7.18 Configuration menu Pr 5--
_______________________________________________________________________
Setting date and time Pr 500
Setting main operating mode Pr 510
Setting switching operating mode Pr 511
Settings for different operating modes Pr 515
Scrolling message settings Pr 516
Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 520
7 Settings for quick-operator mode Pr 521
Settings for price labeling mode Pr 525
Configuring operator keys with operator no. Pr 530
PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535
Printing out PLU direct keys Pr 536
Tare fixed value memory Pr 540
Rounding and price calculating settings Pr 545
Designing ticket and releasing barcode print Pr 550
Designing labels and releasing barcode print Pr 555
Labels configuration management Pr 556
Foreign currency settings Pr 560
Ticket call-up data volume Pr 570
_______________________________________________________________________
7.18.1 Setting date and time ....................................................... Pr500
Select 500
confirm
Pr500
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Setting date
02= Setting time
03= Print year number either 2 or 4-digit
04= Date presentation
7 - 84 6.111.98.5.01.18
Setting date
Submenu 01
Pr500
Enter date 01 190508
Input DDMMYY
The sequence is dependent on the setting in submenu 04
save
Setting time
7
Submenu 02
Pr500
Enter time 02 0908
Input hhmm
save
Printing year either 2 or 4-digital

Submenu 03
Pr500
0= Year with 2 digits
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 85
Date representation
Submenu 04
Pr500
save
Input in Print
Pr 500/ 01 Example
00 Day-Month-Y ear numeric DDMMYY 21.07.06
7 01 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMMYY 21July 06
02 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMM 21July
03 Month year alphanumeric MMYYDD July 06
04 Month-Day-Y ear American numeric MMDDYY 07.21.06
05 Month-Day-Y ear American alphanumeric MMDDYY July 21.06
06 Year-Month-Day Hungarian numeric YYMMDD 06.07.21
07 Year-Month-Day Hungarian alphanumeric YYMMDD 06July 21
08 Day-Month-Y ear numeric DDMMYY 21-07-06
09 Day-Month-Y ear alphanumeric DDMMYY 21-July-06
7 - 86 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.18.2 Setting main operating mode Pr510

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.
The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.
Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination
<Shift>+ <ESC>.
Select 510
confirm
Pr510 7
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01 = Select main operating type
02= Select layout
03= Addition of customer total
04= Select paper type
Selecting main operating mode

Submenu 01
Pr510
save
01= Multi-operator mode

02= Self-service mode
03= Quick-service mode
04= Price labeling with manual triggering
05= Price labeling with automatic start
Selecting layout
Submenu 02
Pr510
0= Ticket layout (only possible for ticket paper)
1= Label layout
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 87
Addition of customer total
Only effective on labels.
Example: A customer buys several articles. One label is created per article Afterwards a
total label is created
The total is printed if ”with addition” has been set.
Submenu 03
Pr510
0= without addition of customer total.
7 1= with addition of customer total.
save
Select paper type

Submenu 04 Pr510
0= Ticket paper
1 = Label paper (only possible for label printer)
confirm
7 - 88 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.18.3 Setting switching operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr511

2 operating modes can be set simultaneously.
The main operating mode is set in Pr 510 and switching operating mode in Pr 511.
Rapid switching between the operating modes occurs with the key combination
<Shift>+ <ESC>.
Select 511
confirm
Pr511
Enter submenu 01 7
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select switching operating mode
02= Select layout
03= Addition of customer total
04= Select paper type
Selecting switching operating mode

Submenu 01
Pr511
save

Selecting layout
Only effective for operating modes that allow ticket and label
layout e.g. multi-operator mode.
Submenu 02
Pr511
1= Label layout
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 89
Addition of customer total
Only effective on labels.
Submenu 03 Pr511
0= without addition of customer total.
1= with addition of customer total.
save
Select paper type

7 Submenu 04 Pr511
0= Ticket paper
confirm
7.18.4 Settings for different operating modes ........................... Pr515
Select 515
confirm
Pr515
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Automatic zerosetting.
02= Open tickets / labels
03= Origin labeling
04= Automatic data of origin number.
05= Negative customer total permitted or not permitted.
06= Determination of sales.
07= Mandatory input for By Count piece
08= Mandatory input for fixed weight
Automatic zero setting

Submenu 01
Pr515
0= Scale is reset (within the limits for automatic zerosetting).
1= Zerosetting error 115 is displayed, when the weight value is below zero.
2= Scale is not set to zero.
save
7 - 90 6.111.98.5.01.18
Open tickets / labels
Submenu 02
Pr515
0 = open tickets are printed.
After switching on the scales, open tickets are automatically printed.
1= open tickets are not printed and not deleted.
If open tickets exist after the scales have been switched on, they have to be finalized
(<Total> <OP>).
save
7
Origin labeling
Submenu 03
Pr515
0= Origin labeling off.
1= Enter data of origin number manually.
2 =Use defined data of origin number.
save
Defining data of origin number

Submenu 04
Pr515
00-99 = defined traceability no.
save
All articlse (PLUs) that are marked with traceability data are printed with the text
that is stored under the defined traceability number.
Negative customer total

Submenu 05
Pr515
0= Customer total cannot become negative.
1= Customer total can become negative.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 91
Sales calculation
To create the reports ( Pr310 and Pr 311), the sold items have to be added in the total
memory.
Submenu 06
Pr515
0= Sold items are not added to the total memories.
1 = Sold items are added to the total memories.
save
7
Mandatory input for By Count pieces
Submenu 07
Pr515
0= Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/16
1= Mandatory input for By Count piece
save
Mandatory input for fixed weight

Submenu 08
Pr515
0= Adopt setting from PLU Pr 110/19
1= Mandatory input for fixed weight and By Count fixed weight
save
7 - 92 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.18.5 Scrolling message settings ............................................ Pr 516
Select 516
confirm
Pr516
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select scrolling message no. from Pr 202 7
02= Select display location
03= Activate scrolling message
04 = Test scrolling message
Selecting scrolling message no.

Submenu 01
Pr516
00= Scrolling message not active
00-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202
save
Selecting display location

Submenu 02
Pr516
0= Scrolling message on customer side
1= Scrolling message on operator side
2= Scrolling message on both sides
save
Activating scrolling message

Submenu 03
Pr516
0 = Scrolling message starts even with open operator accounts.
1= Scrolling message only starts when the scale is not being operated.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 93
Testing scrolling message
Submenu 04
Pr516
04 1
confirm &Zscrolling message
The scrolling message is displayed with 04 - - - - -
control characters
7
7.18.6 Settings for multi-operator mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 520
_______________________________________________________________________
To enable the settings in Pr 520 to be applied, the multi-operator
operating mode has to be set.
Pr 510/ 01 -01 Multi-operator mode
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 520
confirm Pr520
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Constant key function
02= Print article and total label
03= Items operator display mode
04= Cash register functions
05= Amount tend./change operation
06= Talon printout
07= Repeat ticket
08= Open ticket again
09= Print cancellation and canceled products
10= Print included VAT
11= Print ticket, as required
Constant key function

Submenu 01
Pr520
0= Fix unit price
1= Fix tare value
2= Fix unit price and tare value
save
7 - 94 6.111.98.5.01.18
Printing article and total label
Prerequisite
- Pr 510/ 02 -1 Label layout is set
or
- Pr 511/ 02 -1 Label layout is set
Submenu 02
Pr520
1= Only print total label
2= Only print article label
7
save

The article label is printed when an article is registered.
The total label is printed when the <Total> and, e.g., <OP1> keys are pressed.
The article is registered but not printed when an operator key, e.g. <OP1>, is pressed.
The total label is printed when the <Total> and, e.g., <OP1> keys are pressed.
2= Only print article label
The article label is printed when an article is registered.
The total is displayed when the <Total> and, e.g., <OP1> keys are pressed.
_______________________________________________________________________
The number of items is printed on the total label.
The customer total (€) is only printed, if addition of customer total is set
in Pr510/03 -1 or Pr511/03 -1.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 95
Items operator display
Submenu 03
Pr520
1 Display for sheet cancellation
1 2 3
2 Display after recording
3 Display for total/subtotal
0= inactive
1= active
7 save
Example: Total
[1]
The operator number ”OP 1” and the *
OP 1 Po 2 2,54
number of registered items ”Po 2”
appear in the display.
Cash register functions

Pr520
Submenu 04
04 0
Enter selection
0= Cash register does not open; registration is always permitted
1= Cash register opens after pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You can register when the cash register is open.
2= Cash register opens only after registration and
pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You can register when the cash register is open.
3= Cash register opens after pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You cannot register when the cash register is open.
4= Cash register opens only after registration and
pressing <Total> and<operator> keys.
You cannot register when the cash register is open.
save
7 - 96 6.111.98.5.01.18
Amount tend./change operation
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/10 -1 Ticket journal on
Submenu 05 Pr520
05 0
Enter selection
0= without amount tend./change operation
1= Amount tend./change operation with a currency
2= Combined amount tend./change operation in local currency and foreign currency *
save 7
_______________________________________________________________________
If the amount paid in/out is to be printed, activate printout in Pr 550/
12 -1.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Recording with full ticket memory no longer possible. ”JournAl”
appears in the display.
- Call-up and delete ticket journal via EDP interface, e.g.WinCWS.
Recording is permitted again.
_______________________________________________________________________
Talon printout
Pr520
Submenu 06
06 00
Enter selection
00= without talon
01-99 = with talon, the entered number corresponds to the delay time in seconds.
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 97
Repeating ticket
The complete and printed ticket can be printed again.
Pr520
Submenu 07
07 0
Enter selection
0= without repeat ticket
1= with repeat ticket
save
7
Opening ticket again
Pr520
Submenu 08
08 0
Enter selection
0= without ticket reopening
1= with ticket reopening
save
7 - 98 6.111.98.5.01.18
Printing cancellation and canceled articles
Submenu 09
Pr520
0= without printing cancellation and canceled articles
1= with printing cancellation and canceled articles
save
Printing included VAT

also see page 7 - 37 7
Submenu 10
Pr520
0= without printing included VAT
1= Printout of included VAT
save
Ticket printout, as required.

Submenu 11
Pr520
0= Ticket printout as required (<Shift> + <OP>)
1= Always print ticket
save
_______________________________________________________________________
Customer ticket can be deactivated
The scale offers the option of suppressing printout of the customer
ticket.
According to EC directive 90/384/EC for Non-Automatic Weighing
Instruments, the customer is entitled to a receipt in order to check the
sales transactions in accordance with Appendix 1, No.14.
Suppression of the customer ticket should therefore only be activated
if you are sure that there is no customer requirement for printout of a
customer ticket.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 99
7.18.7 Settings for quick service mode Pr 521
Description, see page 6 - 4

_______________________________________________________________________
To enable the settings in Pr 521 to be applied, the quick service
operating mode has to be set.
Pr 510/ 01 -03 Quick-service mode
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 521
7
confirm
Pr521
Enter selection 1
0= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, recording with the Operator key.
1= Article call-up via PLU-direct key, automatic recording.
confirm
7 - 100 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.18.8 Settings for price labeling mode * ................................... Pr525

_______________________________________________________________________
To ensure that the settings in Pr 525, it is absolutely necessary to set
the operating mode multi-operator mode.
Pr 510/ 01 -04Price labeling with release by hand
or
Pr 510/ 01 -05Price labeling with automatic start
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 525
7
confirm
Pr525
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Labeling mode
02= Piece price multi- label printing
Labeling mode
Submenu 01
Pr525
0= Price labeling
Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported.
Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.
Batch total label with number of items and batch price.
1= Weight labeling
Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported.
Label printing with unit price, sales price and weight.
Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *
2= Weight labeling only
Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is supported.
If only the weight should be printed on the label, the unit price has to be ”0.00”.
Batch total label with number of items and total weight of batch. *
save
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 101
Multiple label printing for price per piece
Submenu 02
Pr525
00= Labels are printed one after the other without delay.
01 - 99= Delay time in seconds. Labels are printed consecutively with delay.
save
7
7 - 102 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.18.9 Allocating operator no. to operator keys ........................ Pr 530
Select 530 Pr530

confirm __ - ___
Enter key number (1-16) Pr530

confirm 02 - 002
7
Pr530
Enter operator number (1-999) 02 - 020
save
7.18.10 PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535
Select 535
confirm
Pr535
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= 10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input
02= PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad.
03= PLU direct key mode
04= PLU direct key allocation
05= PLU range limitation
06= Delay time for PLU no. input
10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input

Submenu 01
Pr535
0= Enter unit price via ten-key keypad.

Switch to PLU no. input by pressing the <Switch> key.
1= PLU no. input via ten-key keypad.
Switch to unit price input by pressing the <Switch> key.
2= It is possible to enter the PLU no. via the ten-key keypad, but not the unit price.
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 103
PLU input: number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad
Submenu 02
Pr535
2= PLU no. input with 2 digits
7 confirm
PLU direct key mode

Submenu 03
Pr535
0= No range limitation: The PLU direct key no. corresponds to the PLU product number.
With range limitation: The PLU direct key no. calls up the PLU article number
according to the range, see submenu 05.
1= PLU direct keypad is locked.
PLU call-up is only possible with the ten-key keypad.
2= The PLU direct key no. calls up the individually allocated PLU article numbers,
see submenu 04.
The range limitation only applies for PLU no. call-up via the ten-key keypad.
confirm
PLU direct key allocation

Prerequisite
- Pr 535/ 03 -2 PLU article no. is taken from the PLU direct key allocation.
An article (PLU no.) can be allocated to any PLU direct key.
Submenu 04
Pr535
Enter PLU direct key no. (001-246) 04 019 - 000019
confirm
Pr535
Enter PLU article number (0-999999) 04 019 - 000001
confirm
The PLU direct key is used to call-up the allocated PLU article number.
7 - 104 6.111.98.5.01.18
PLU range limitation
_______________________________________________________________________
The PLU range limitation does not affect the PLU direct keys where
the setting is Pr 535/03 -2.
_______________________________________________________________________
If only some of the articles stored in a scale are required, the articles can be limited for this
scale.
Example: There are 2000 articles stored in the scales.
Fruit articles from PLU 1 to PLU 100.
Cheese articles from PLU 101 to PLU 200.
Cold cut articles from PLU 201 to PLU 800 etc. 7
Only cheese is supposed to be sold at the cheese scale.
The articles in the cheese scale are limited to articles 101 to 200.
This means that the lowest range article number is allocated to PLU 1.
Submenu 05
Pr535
Enter the lowest PLU article no. in the range 05 ___101 - 999999
confirm
Enter the highest PLU article number in the Pr535

range 05 000101 - ___200
confirm
Article 101 is called up with PLU no. 1, and article 200 with PLU no. 100.
Calls outside of the range are rejected.
W/o range limitation With range limitation
Article number = PLU-No
Article
PLU call-up Article PLU call-up
Fig. 85: PLU range limitation
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 105
Delay time PLU no. input
If e.g. a 6-digit PLU no. input is expected, and only a 2-digit no. is input, the PLU is called
after the set delay time.
Submenu 06
Pr535
Input time delaye.g.10 06 10
00= The desired PLU is called with <Enter> or after entering all digits.
00-20 = The desired PLU is called after the set delay time.
7 confirm
The delay time value (01-20) is not specified in seconds.
1= small delay time;
20= large delay time.
7 - 106 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.18.11 Printing PLU direct keys .................................................. Pr536
Overview of the allocation of articles (PLU number) to the PLU direct keys.
Select 536
confirm
Pr536
Start printing. 0
The PLU direct key list is printed.
Esc Cancel print job. 7
1 PLU number
2 PLU direct key
2 1
Fig. 86: PLU direct keys
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 107
7.18.12 Tare fixed value memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr540
Select 540 Pr540

confirm _ - ____
Enter the tare direct key (1-4) Pr540

confirm 1 - 0000
7 Pr540
Enter assigned tare value 1 - 0002
confirm
7.18.13 Rounding and price calculation settings for

national currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 545
The last 2 digits of the customer total and article total can be rounded.
If a related text is required, this can be released for printing in Pr 550/ 07. The text has to
be defined in Pr 200.
_______________________________________________________________________
Rounding and price calculation settings are specific to country.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 545
confirm
Pr545
01
Enter submenu
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Rounding of customer total
02= Rounding of article total
03= Rounding for By count
7 - 108 6.111.98.5.01.18
Rounding methods for customer total *
Submenu 01 Pr545
confirm
0= no rounding
1= rounding down to 5
5= mathematical rounding to 5*
6= mathematical rounding to 10* 7
Rounding of article total *

Submenu 02 Pr545
confirm
0= no rounding
Examples of rounding, see page 7 - 110.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 109
Examples of rounding
Setting Explanation Example

0 No rounding 10.43 è 10.43
Rounding down to 5 10.42 è 10.40
1
The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”. 10.48 è 10.45
2
The last digit is always ”0”: 10.48 è 10.40
3
7 The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”. 10.83 è 10.50
4
The last digits are always ”00”. 10.76 è 10.00
Mathematical rounding to 5 10.42 è 10.40
5 The last digit is always ”5” or ”0”. 10.43 è 10.45
10.48 è 10.50
6
The last digit is always ”0”: 10.48 è 10.50
The last digits are always ”00”, 25”,”50” or ”75”. 10.23 è 10.25
7 10.45 è 10.50
10.66 è 10.75
10.88 è 11.00
8 The last digits are always ”50” or ”00”. 10.34 è 10.50
10.83 è 11.00
9
The last digits are always ”00”. 10.78 è 11.00
Rounding for By count

Submenu 03
Pr545
Enter selection
0= mathematical 03 0
1= round up next position
save
7 - 110 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.19 Ticket design overview
Information can be added, disabled or modified on the ticket.
1
1 Scale number
17 2
Pr 603 Enter scale number
16
2 Ticket counter 3
15
Pr 550/10 - 1 Ticket counter print 4
14
3 Operator number 5
4 Basic price
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 unit price 6 7
5 Selling price
13
6 Tare
Enter Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 PLU tare
Pr 550/ 03 Tare printout
7 Non-weighed, key <Non-weighed> 7
8 Minus input, key <Minus input>
8
9 Ticket total
10 Footer text
Pr 201 Enter footer text
12
Pr 550/ 05 Footer text printout 9
11 Barcode see page 7 - 16. 11
Pr 215/ 05 Totals barcode
Pr215/ 04 Barcode for non-PLU minus
Pr 110/ PLU number/ 05 PLU barcode 10
Pr 210/ Barcode structure for instore code
Pr 550/ 01 Barcode printout
Pr 550/ 02 Barcode height
Fig. 87: Ticket example
12 Item counter
13 PLU article text
Pr 110/PLU no./10 Enter PLU article text
Pr 550/ 8 Select font
Pr 550/ 9 Number of product text lines to be printed
14 Time
Pr 500/ 02
15 Date
Pr 500/ 01 Enter date
Pr 500/ 03 year number either 2- or 4-digit
Pr 500/ 04 Select date format
16 Department no.
Pr 604 Enter number
17 Header text
Pr 201 Create header text
Pr 550 / 04 Printout of header text
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 111
7.19.1 Creating ticket ................................................................. Pr 550
Select 550
confirm
Pr550
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7 01= Print barcode on ticket
02= Barcode height in mm on ticket
03= Print tare on ticket
04= Print header text
05= Print footer text
06= Print foreign currency supplementary text
07= Print rounding supplementary text
08= Font change on ticket
09= Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket
10= Ticket counter printout
11= Print foreign currency *
12 = Print amount paid in/out
13= Print supplementary texts
14= Print header logo
15= Print footer logo
Printing barcode on ticket

Submenu 01
Pr550
Enter selection
01 000
1 Article barcode
1 2 3
2 Totals barcode
3 Talon barcode
0= Do not print barcode on ticket
1= Print barcode
save
Barcode height in mm on ticket

Submenu 02 Pr550
5-22 mm
confirm
7 - 112 6.111.98.5.01.18
Printing tare on ticket
Submenu 03 Pr550
0= Do not print tare value on ticket
1= Print tare value, net weight is marked.
(country-specific character) Germany = N.
2= Print tare value, net weight is not marked.
confirm
Printing header text

7
Prerequisite
The header text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Requirement
The header text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Submenu 04 Pr550
00= no printout of header text
01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 56.
confirm
Printing footer text

Prerequisite
The footer text has to be defined in Pr 201.
Submenu 05 Pr550
00= no printout of footer text
01-99 = Footer text number, see Pr 201 on page 7 - 56.
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 113
Printing foreign currency supplementary text
Submenu 06 Pr550
000000000= No foreign currency supplement. text
1-999999999= Foreign currency supplement. text number see Pr 200
confirm
Printing rounding supplementary text

7 _______________________________________________________________________
The rounding supplementary text is only printed if rounding has taken
place.
_______________________________________________________________________
Submenu 07 Pr550
000000000= without rounding suppl. text
1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number, see Pr 200
confirm
1 Total
2 rounded total
3 Rounding text
1
3
Fig. 88: Example of rounding text
7 - 114 6.111.98.5.01.18
Font change on tickets
Each article text was created with selected font. This PLU font is used for printing. (Text in
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 10).
A fixed and pre-set font can be defined for all printouts. This font has priority over the PLU
font.
Submenu 08 Pr550
000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= fixed font. The font set in the PLU is ignored.
7
confirm
Number of PLU product text lines to be printed on ticket

Submenu 09 Pr550
0= all text lines are printed
1-9 = the corresponding number of lines are printed
10= text lines not printed
confirm
Ticket counter printout

Submenu 10 Pr550
0= Counter is not printed
1= Counter is printed
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 115
Printing foreign currency
Submenu 11
1 Print conversion rate 11 0000
2 Print unit price, selling price and total 1 2 3 4
3 Print selling price and total
4 Only print total
0= No printout
1= Printout
7 save
Printing amount paid in/out

Prerequisite
- Pr 520/ 05 -1 or2 Amount paid in/out enabled.
Requirement
- Pr 520/ 05 -1 or2 Amount paid in/out enabled.
Submenu 12
Pr550
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
Printing supplementary texts

Prerequisite
- Pr 110/PLU no./11 Assign supplement. text to article
Submenu 13
Pr550
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
7 - 116 6.111.98.5.01.18
Printing header logo
Submenu 14
Pr550
Enter logo ID 14 __12
0000= Do not print logo
0001-9999 = Print logo with specified ID
confirm
Header and footer logos can be created with Bizerba Label Designer and loaded onto the
scale.
Logos present in the scale can be printed out, see page 7 - 8. 7
Printing footer logo

Submenu 14
Pr550
Enter logo ID 15 __12
0000= Do not print logo
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 117
7.20 Label design - overview
Information can be added, disabled or modified on the label.
1 Label texts
12 13 1
Pr 555/ 16 Print release for standard or
11
alternative texts
Pr 555/ 20 and 21 Alternative texts 10 2
2 Sell-by date
1
Pr 555/ 05 Print
Pr 110/ PLU no./ 04 shelf-life days 1
Pr 215/ 01 Non-PLU shelf-life days 9 3
7 3 Net weight
4 Selling price 1
8
7 6 5 4
Fig. 89: Example of label 43 mm

5 Basic price
Pr 110/PLU no./ 01 . . . . . . . . . Enter PLU unit price
6 Print price frame
Pr 555/ 16
7 Packed-on date
Pr 555/ 05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release print
Pr 500/ 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter date
8 Barcode
Pr 110/ PLU-No./ 05 . . . . . . . . Enter article barcode
Pr 215/ 2; 3; 4; 5 . . . . . . . . . . . Enter non-PLU barcode and total barcode
Pr 555/ 06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release barcode print
Pr 555/ 07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter height of barcode
9 Operator no.
Pr 555/ 17
10 PLU article text
Pr 110/ PLU-No/ 10 . . . . . . . . . Enter article text
Pr 110/ PLU-No/11 . . . . . . . . . Assign supplem. text
Pr 555/ 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release print of supplementary texts
Pr 555/ 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create beginning of text field
Pr 555/ 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Create beginning of data field
Pr 555/ 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set data field monitoring
11 Logo printout
Pr 555/ 11
12 Header
Pr 201 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter header text
Pr 555/ 09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release print of header text
13 Tare
Pr 110/PLU no./ 03 . . . . . . . . . Enter PLU tare value
Pr 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter tare value for the tare fixed value key
Pr 555/ 08 -1- . . . . . . . . . . . . . Release tare print
7 - 118 6.111.98.5.01.18
BLD labels
These labels are designed in BLD. The labels are issued with a number and are sent to
the scales and stored there.
_______________________________________________________________________
Release BLD text fields and logo fields during commissioning
(memory management) Pr 606/ 3 and 4, see page 7 - 144
_______________________________________________________________________
1 Logo field 1
2 Text field 1 7
1
Fig. 90: Example of label layout in BLD
Allocate text field content, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 12, on page 7 - 48.
Allocate logo field content, see Pr 110/PLU no./ 13, on page 7 - 49
1 Allocated logo in logo field 1

2 Allocated text in text field 1
Fig. 91: Example of BLD label in the

scales
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 119
7.20.1 Designing labels .............................................................. Pr 555
Select 555
confirm
Pr555
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
7 01= Label type
02= Select BLD labels
03= Label size
04= Change label distance
05= Packed-on and sell-by date on label
06= Barcode on label
07= Barcode height in mm on label
08= Tare printout on label
09= Print header text
10= Alternative text with sell-by date
11= Logo printout
12= Beginning of text field
13= Beginning of data field
14= Monitoring data field
15= Font change on label
16= Print price frame and texts on label
17= Print operator no., machine ID or check digit * on label
18= Print foreign currency
19= Rotate layout by 180° (for label paper only) and reverse operation
20= Alternative text with packed-on date
21= Alternative text with use-by date
22= Print units on the label
23= Print speed for label layout
7 - 120 6.111.98.5.01.18
Label type
Submenu 01
Pr555
00= Label from BLD, see 555 / 02, only possible if BLD layouts are available.
Label type Width W x height H
01= Bizerba label standard 58mm x 43 mm
02= Bizerba label layout 1 58mm x 43 mm
05= ISB with barcode 50mm x 48 mm 7
06= ISB w/o barcode 50mm x 48 mm
07= Narrow label with barcode 33mm x 47 mm
08= Narrow label w/o barcode 33mm x 47 mm
09= Narrow label w/o barcode 37mm x 36 mm
confirm
Example:
W Label width
H Label height
Fig. 92: Standard 01 Layout 02
Fig. 93: Narrow label 07 Narrow label 08
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 121
Selecting BLD labels
Submenu 02
Pr555
01... Select BLD label
Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01
confirm
Label size
7 Submenu 03
Pr555
Enter label height, e.g. 43mm 03 043-58
28-148 mm Pr555
confirm 03 043-__
_______________________________________________________________________
Input of 54, 55 or 56 is rejected.
_______________________________________________________________________
Enter label width e.g. 58mm Pr555

10-58 mm 03 043- 58
confirm
Changing label distance

Submenu 04
Pr555
Enter distance 04 16
8-40dot (8dot= 1mm)
confirm
Packed-on and sell-by date on label

Submenu 05

1 Packed-on date 05 11
2 Sell-by date 1 2
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
7 - 122 6.111.98.5.01.18
Barcode on label
Submenu 06

1 Article barcode 06 11
2 Totals barcode 1 2
0= No printout
1= Printout
confirm
7
Barcode height in mm
Submenu 07
Pr555
Enter height of barcode 07 15
5-22 mm Only effective for pre-defined labels.
Not effective with BLD labels.
confirm
1
2
3
3
Fig. 94: Barcode height

1 Beginning of text field
2 Beginning of data field
3 Barcode height
Tara printout on label

Submenu 08
Pr555
0= without tare printout
1 = with tare printout
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 123
Printing header text
Submenu 09 Pr555
00= Do not print header text
01-99 = Header text number, see Pr 201
confirm
1
1 Header field
2 Logo 2
7 3 Header text 3
Fig. 95: Header field

Alternative text with sell-by date
Submenu 10
Pr555
000000000= No alternative text. Standard text is printed
1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text, see Pr 200
confirm
Logo printout
Submenu 11
Pr555
Enter logo ID 11 0007
0000= without logo
0001= Logo Kesko
0002= Logo Tuko
0003= Logo Eko
0004= Logo Sokos A

0005= Logo Sokos B
0006= Logo C
0007= Logo Recycling
confirm
7 - 124 6.111.98.5.01.18
Beginning of text field
Submenu 12 Pr555
Beginning of text field in mm 12 00
00= Text field 1 automatically starts 11 mm from top edge of label
11-84 = Beginning of text field in mm from top edge of label
confirm
Start of data field

Submenu 13 Pr555 7
Beginning of data field in mm 13 00
00= Data field is automatically positioned at the bottom edge of the label
11-84 = Beginning of data field 2 in mm from top edge of label
confirm
Example of label fields

3 Data field 1
2
4 Label height
3
4
Fig. 96: Label fields
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 125
Data field monitoring
Data field monitoring prevents the text field being pushed into the data field.
Submenu 14 Pr555
0 = no data field monitoring
1= Data field monitoring on
confirm
Example: 3 supplement. texts were assigned to article ”Calf's liver” With setting ”Data
field monitoring on” the supplementary texts are not printed, as print lies within data field.
7
1
2
5
5
3
Fig. 97: Data field monitoring on no data field monitoring

3 Data field
5 Article and supplementary texts
7 - 126 6.111.98.5.01.18
Font change on tickets
A font can be defined for all printouts. This font has priority over the PLU font.
Submenu 15 Pr555
000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= fixed font
confirm
Printing price frame and texts on label 7

Submenu 16
Pr555
1 Print standard text, e.g. ”Tare” 16 1111111
2 Print standard text e.g. ”Packaged” or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/
20)
3 Print standard text e.g. ”best before” or
alternative text (enter text number in Pr555/ 10
and Pr555/ 21)
4 Print standard text, e.g. ”Net or piece”
5 Print standard text, e.g. ”Price”
6 Print price frame
7 Print supplementary texts
0= No printout
1= Printout
save
Printing operator no., machine ID, or check digit * on label

Submenu 17 Pr555
0= without output
1 = with operator no. (no. input in Pr 530)
2 =with machine ID (no. input in Pr 605)
3= with digit code *
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 127
Printing foreign currency
Submenu 18
Pr555
1 Print conversion rate 18 1100
2 Print unit price, selling price and total 1 2 3 4
3 Print selling price and total
4 Only print total
0= No printout
1= Printout
7
confirm
180º rotation and reverse operation (for label paper only)

Submenu 19
1 1= Print layout rotated by 180º 19 11
2 1= Reverse label before printing 1 2
0= No rotation and no reverse operation
1= Layout is printed rotated by 180º; label is reversed before printing
180º rotation
For labels with pre-print turned by 180
Fig. 98: Example: No rotation Example: Turned layout
7 - 128 6.111.98.5.01.18
Reverse operation for standard labels
The header field height can differ on labels,
therefore the header text cannot be preprinted on the next label.
The label must be withdrawn to the label start before commencing printing (reverse
operation).
If a header text has been defined, this will be printed after reversing.
If no header text has been defined, the header text area can be used for the article text.
If the label has a header field height of 10 mm, reversing is not necessary.
Reversing in the case of BLD labels

During the creation of freely programmable labels with the PC program Bizerba Label 7
Designer, whether or not reverse operation is used for printing is defined.
The reversing function must be selected in the BLD project.
If reverse operation is selected, all fields, e.g. article or barcode, can be placed in the
header area. The layout is printed after reversing.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 129
Alternative text for packed-on date
Submenu 20
Pr555
000000000= No alternative text print
confirm
7 Alternative text for use-by date
Submenu 21 Pr555
000000000= No alternative text print
confirm
Printing units on the label
Submenu 22
Pr555
Enter selection
22 1111
1 Print price with unit
1 2 3 4
2 Print unit price with unit
3 Print weight with unit
4 Print tare with unit
0= No printout
1= Print unit
confirm
Printing speed for label layout

Submenu 23
The print quality can be improved if the print speed is reduced.
00= 44 mm/s 23 04
01= 53 mm/s (e.g. when used with batteries)
02= 66 mm/s
03= 88 mm/s
04= 102 mm/s (Standard)
05= 120 mm/s
confirm
7 - 130 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.20.2 Labels configuration management ................................. Pr 556

All label settings in Pr 555 can be stored in Pr 556/01.
Prerequisite
- The layout memory has to be deleted.
- Pr 556/ 03 Clear layout memory
Select 556
confirm Pr556
7
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Save configuration from Pr 555
02= Select label configuration
03= Delete label configuration
Saving configuration from Pr 555

Submenu 01 Pr556
1= Layout memory 1
2= Layout memory 2
3= Layout memory 3
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 131
Selecting label configuration
Submenu 02 Pr556
0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing
1= Configuration from layout memory 1
confirm
7
Deleting label configuration
Delete from memory x to memory x
x = Layout memory 1-3 Pr556
Submenu 03 03 1-1
Pr556
Enter selection 03 2-1
confirm
Pr556
Enter selection 03 2-3
confirm
The label configuration in memories 2 and 3 is deleted.
7 - 132 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.20.3 Foreign currency settings ............................................... Pr 560
Select 560
confirm
Pr560
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Select foreign currency function
7
02= Select foreign/ second currency display
03= Foreign currency calculating mode
04= Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout
05= Foreign currency symbol on label for price field
06= Decimal places of foreign currency
07= Foreign currency factor
08= Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)
09= Rounding of foreign currency
10= Foreign currency translation rules
Selecting foreign currency function

Submenu 01 Pr560
0= Euro/foreign currency off
1= Foreign currency function on
2= Euro function on (only possible for non-Euro devices)
confirm
Selecting foreign/ second currency display

Submenu 02 Pr560
0= Foreign currency display off (Euro or foreign currency key non-functional)
1= Foreign currency display on
Display unit and selling price, total and/or subtotal and
total in payment in/out mode
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 133
Foreign currency calculation method
Submenu 03 Pr560
0= Total calculated through conversion
1= Total calculated through addition of selling price
confirm
Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout

7 Submenu 04 Pr560
Enter currency symbol 04 C11 LI H-
See text input page 7 - 12
confirm
Foreign currency symbol on label for price field

Submenu 05 Pr560
Enter currency symbol 05 C11 LI H-
See text input page 7 - 12
confirm
Decimal places in foreign currency

Submenu 06 Pr560
0- 3= Decimal places in foreign currency
confirm
7 - 134 6.111.98.5.01.18
Foreign currency factor
Submenu 07
Pr560
0= factor 1
1= factor 10
2= factor 100
3= factor 1000
4= factor 10000
confirm
7
Currency exchange rate (calculation factor)
Submenu 08
Pr560
Enter selection 08 0001,00
e.g. 0001.01
confirm
Rounding of foreign currency

Submenu 09
Pr560
0= no rounding
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 135
Foreign currency translation rules
Submenu 10
Pr560
0= Internal calculation in foreign currency
1= Internal calculation in national currency. The output amount is converted in foreign
currency.
confirm
7
7.20.4 Ticket call-up data volume .............................................. Pr 570
Prerequisite
- Pr 606/10 - 1 Ticket journal on
Single items and totals are always transferred when calling up ticket journals via the host
interface. This menu is used to set additional data records.
Select 560
confirm

1 1= Transfer of total EAN code. 111
0= without 1 2 3
2 1= Transfer of Item EAN code.
0= without
3 1= Transfer of article text.
0= without
7 - 136 6.111.98.5.01.18
Commissioning Pr 6--
7.21 Commissioning menu Pr 6--
_______________________________________________________________________
TCP-IP settings Pr 600
Display current IP address Pr 601
Print out of communication settings Pr 602
Setting scale number Pr 603
Setting department number Pr 604
Setting machine ID Pr 605
Commissioning Pr 606 7
Setting scale for system (continuous operation) Pr 607
Control display lightning Pr 610
Turn-of f time of scale Pr 615
WLAN settings Pr 621
Beeper on/off Pr 622
Sensitivity of scale Pr 625
Change key function Pr 630
Keyboard selection Pr 631
Clear RAM Pr 666
Enter password for menu Pr 690
Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695
_______________________________________________________________________
7.21.1 TCP-IP settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 600
Select 600
confirm
Pr600
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= DHCP
02= Display of scale's current IP address
03= IP: IP address if no DHCP selected
04= Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected
05= Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected
06= DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected
06= DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected
08= Host name: A name can be assigned to the scales. 32 ASCII characters are possible.
09= Leasing address: Display of IP address that has been assigned to the scales by the
DHCP server.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 137
DHCP
Submenu 01 Pr600
0= no DHCP, use fixed IP address
1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.
The leasing address has been requested, see Pr 600/09.
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
If the DHCP server does not assign the requested leasing address,
7 set the leasing address to 000000000000 in Pr 600/09.
Then, the DHCP server assigns a new address to the scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Display of scale current IP address
Pr600
Submenu 02 02 172017168010
confirm
IP: IP address if no DHCP selected

Submenu 03
Pr600
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172.17.168.10 would be 172017168010
confirm
Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected

Submenu 04
Pr600
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 255.255.192.000 would be 255255192000.
confirm
Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected

Submenu 05
Pr600
confirm
7 - 138 6.111.98.5.01.18
DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP selected
Submenu 06
Pr600
confirm
DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP selected

Submenu 07
Pr600 7
confirm
Host name:
Submenu 08
Pr600
Enter name . 08 C32 LI H-
32 ASCII characters are possible.
confirm
Leasing address
Display and input
The scales are assigned an IP address (leasing address) by the DHCP server. To do this,
DHCP has to be switched on, see Pr 600/01-1.
If the scales are switched off, the assigned address remains reserved for a certain time. If
the displayed leasing address is not changed, the scales request this address again from
the DHCP server after being switched on. By entering 000000000000 the DHCP server is
requested to assign a new address.
Submenu 09
Pr600
Leasing address 09 172017168008
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 139
7.21.2 Display current IP address .............................................. Pr601
Select 601
Pr601
confirm
172017168010
7.21.3 Printout of communication settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr602

7 Select 602
Pr602
confirm
1
confirm
The communication settings are printed out
Fig. 99: Communication settings
7.21.4 Setting scale number ....................................................... Pr 603
Select 603
confirm
Pr603
Enter scale number 12
01-32
confirm
7 - 140 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.21.5 Setting department number ............................................. Pr 604
Select 604
confirm
Pr604
Enter department number 120
001-999
confirm 7
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 141
7.21.6 Setting machine ID ........................................................... Pr 605
Select 605
confirm
Pr605
Enter machine ID 1234
0001-9999
confirm
7
7.21.7 Commissioning (memory management) ........................... Pr 606
Text memory in the BC II is dynamic. These memories include texts and logos. Depending
on the request, either more or less memory can be released for PLU, texts, or ticket items.
If changing a value, e.g. number of PLUs, causes the remaining memory to be too small,
the entry is rejected. In this case, other values, e.g. number of BLD text fields have to be
reduced.
Select 606
confirm
Pr606
Enter submenu
01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= No. of PLUs
02= Number of supplementary texts per PLU
03= Number of BLD text fields per PLU
04= Number of BLD logo fields per PLU
05= Number of supplementary texts
06= Number of items (ticket memory)
07= By count, fixed weight and VAT
08= Decimal places*
09= Use expanded RAM
10= Journal function
07= Start database configuration
7 - 142 6.111.98.5.01.18
Examples of valid database configuration
2000 PLU
4 supplementary texts per PLU
10 BLD text fields
3 BLD logo fields
500 general texts
1200 items
5000 PLU
3 supplementary texts per PLU
5 BLD text fields
2 BLD logo fields
1000 general texts 7
1200 items
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 143
No. of PLUs
Submenu 01 Pr606
0100 - 10000
confirm
Number of supplementary texts per PLU

Submenu 02 Pr606
7 0-4
confirm
Number of BLD text fields per PLU

Submenu 03 Pr606
0 - 10
confirm
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU

Submenu 04 Pr606
0-3
confirm
Number of supplementary texts

Submenu 05 Pr606
50 - 3000
confirm
7 - 144 6.111.98.5.01.18
Number of items (ticket memory)
Submenu 06 Pr606
50 - 3000
confirm
By count, fixed weight, VAT and tare %

See overview Defining by count article, on page 7 - 33
Submenu 07 7
1 1= By count on 07 1111
2 1= Fixed weight on 1 2
3 1= Activate VAT 3 4
4 1= Tare % permitted
If tare 1% is permitted, the percentage can be entered in Pr110/ 22.
0= off
1= on
confirm
Decimal places*
*This menu is not enabled for all countries.
Submenu 08 Pr606
0-3 = Number of decimal places
4= Country-dependent standard value
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 145
Using expanded RAM
Submenu 09
_______________________________________________________________________
This function is only enabled if the CPU is equipped with an
expanded RAM.
- In the Pr 701 printout, there must be written 2 MB RAM.
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr606
0= without expanded RAM
7
1= with expanded RAM
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Enable expanded memory only if many PLUs and large texts are
used.
If the expanded memory is not required in a scales system, do not
enable the expanded RAM. The expanded RAM slows down the system
during updates.
_______________________________________________________________________
Journal function
Submenu 10 Pr606
0= Ticket journal off
1= Ticket journal on
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Recording with full ticket memory not possible. ”JournAl” appears in
the display.
- Call-up and delete ticket journal via the EDP interface,e.g. with
WinCWS.
Registration is enabled again.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
In some countries, the journal function has to be enabled for amount
tend./change operation (Pr 520/ 5).
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 146 6.111.98.5.01.18
Starting database configuration

Submenu 88 Pr606
Remaining available memory is displayed. 88 375539
Pr606
Enter selection 88 ____90
81 = RAM clearing is carried out and the set configuration values are saved. The scales
boot.
90= RAM clearing is carried out and the standard values are saved.
The standard values are specific to country.
7
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 147
7.21.8 Setting scale for system (continuous operation) . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 607
Continuous operation in system see page 7 - 39.
Function as of program version 2.00.
_______________________________________________________________________
Always note!
- There must be only one master scale in a scale system.
- Each scale within the system must have its own IP network
address (Pr 600).
_______________________________________________________________________
7 Select 607
confirm
Pr 607
Enter submenu 01
01-04
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Scale type
02= Multicast IP address
03= Multicast port number
04= UDP Port number
Scale type
Submenu 01 Pr 607
0= standard scale (Stand alone)
1= Slave scale (system)
9= Master scale (system)
confirm
7 - 148 6.111.98.5.01.18
System conditions with slave scales.
If a scale has been configured as a slave scale, the following texts appear as scrolling
message on the display.
- ”Scale Network off”
Scale not entered in system yet.
- ”Scale Update”
Update of system data running.
- If no message appears, the scale has been entered in the system and master
data from master scale are stored.
- Arrow flashes on display = slave scale in system.
7
_______________________________________________________________________
If the system arrow is flashing, the device functions as master

scale in the system.
_______________________________________________________________________
Multicast IP address
Submenu 02
The Mulitcast IP address indicates to which system the scale was assigned. Any address
within the range of 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 can be assigned. All scales in one
system must have the same Mulitcast IP address.
Pr 607
Enter address 02 239192000024
confirm
Multicast port number

Submenu 03
Basically the works setting must not be changed.
Pr 607
Multicast port number factory settings 03 06789
confirm
UDP port number

Submenu 04
Basically the works setting must not be changed.
Pr 607
UDP port number factory settings 04 01031
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 149
7.21.9 Controlling display lightning .......................................... Pr 610
Select 610
confirm
Pr610
Enter selection 00
00= Display lighting can only be switched on or off manually.
01-99 = Time in seconds.
7 Display lighting is automatically switched on or off after the set time.
confirm
Switch display lighting on manually:
+ Press and hold the <Shift> key

then press the <Switch> key.
The display lighting is switched on or off.
Automatic control of the display lighting:

After the last action performed on the scale, the display lighting switches off automatically
after 1 to 99 seconds.
Setting 01 Display off after approx. 1 second.
Setting 99 Display off after approx. 99 seconds.
When another action starts on the scale, the display lighting is switched on again
automatically.
_______________________________________________________________________
When the display lighting is controlled automatically, the lighting can
still be manually switched off.
If the display lighting is switched off manually, the display lighting can
only be switched on again manually.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 150 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.21.10 Setting turn-off time of scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 615

After a set time the scale is switched off, providing no key function or weight movement
takes place.
Prerequisite
A switch key as main switch.
With the on/off switch, the scale must be manually switched off.
Select 615
confirm 7
Pr615
Enter selection 00
00= Scale is not turned off.
01-99 = Time in minutes, after which the scales are switched off, if no keys are pressed and
no weight movement has taken place.
confirm
7.21.11 WLAN settings Pr 621
Prerequisite
- A WLAN module must be integrated into the scale.
_______________________________________________________________________
Settings can only be made in submenus 02 to 07 if WLAN is
deactivated;621/ 01 -0.
If 00000000 has been entered in 621/ 02, WLAN cannot be activated.
_______________________________________________________________________
Select 621
confirm
Enter submenu Pr621

01
confirm
Submenu overview:
01= Activate WLAN
02= Time slices
03= Ping on/off
04= IP address of WLAN module
05= Test telegram on/off
06= IP address of telegram recipient
07= Port number of telegram recipient
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 151
Activating WLAN
Submenu 01 Pr621
0= WLAN off
1= WLAN on
confirm
_______________________________________________________________________
Procedure for WLAN activation:
- Deactivate WLAN 621/ 01 -0
7 - Make settings in submenus 02 to 07
- Activate WLAN 621/ 01 -1
_______________________________________________________________________
Time slices
The time for which WLAN is to be active can be set.
Pr621
Submenu 02 02 _ -________
Pr606
Enter time slice no., e.g. 1 02 1 -00000000
0-3
Pr621
confirm 02 1 - ________
Enter start and end time Pr621

1 Start time, e.g. 20.00 hours 02 1 -20000800
2 End time, e.g. 08.00 hours 1 2
Active for the whole day= enter 00010001.
Time slice inactive= enter 00000000.
Pr621
confirm 02 _ -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Pr621
Esc Press <ESC> 02
You can now select submenu 3.
7 - 152 6.111.98.5.01.18
Ping on/off
If ping is activated, the scale sends a ping to the WLAN module at set time intervals.
Submenu 03 Pr621
Enter time 03 _300
Recommended setting 300 sec.
0000= Ping off
1-9999 = Ping on; time in sec. between 2 pings.
confirm
7
IP address of WLAN module
The WLAN module is pinged by the scale, so that it always remains in active status.
Submenu 04 Pr621
Enter IP address 04 172017168001
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 stands for 172.17.168.1
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 153
Submenus 05, 06 and 07 enable functional diagnosis of the WLAN.
Test telegram on/off
A test telegram is periodically sent to a host.
Submenu 05 Pr621
Enter time 05 0900
0000= Telegram off
1-9999 = Send telegram on; time in sec. between 2 telegrams.
confirm
7
IP address of telegram recipient
Submenu 06 Pr621
Enter IP address 06 172017168001
Enter 12-digit number without points, e.g. 172017168001 stands for 172.17.168.1
confirm
Port number of telegram recipient

Submenu 07 Pr621
Enter port number 07 49152
1 - 65536
confirm
7.21.12 Beeper on/off Pr 622
Select 622
confirm
Pr622
Enter selection
111
1 Normal beeper
1 2 3
2 Acceptance beeper
3 Error beeper
0= Beeper off
1= Beeper on
save
7 - 154 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.21.13 Sensitivity of scale (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 625
The sensitivity setting regulates damping in the event of vibrations at the place of
installation (e.g. market operation).
_______________________________________________________________________
The higher the setting, the longer the time until standstill of the
display.
_______________________________________________________________________
7
Select 625
confirm
Pr625
Enter selection 0
0= Display sensitive (standard) with stable, vibration-free scale floor area
1
2 increasingly insensitive
..
5= Display insensitive to vibrations
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 155
7.21.14 Changing key functions ................................................... Pr 630
Prerequisite
- Pr 631 - 03 84-key keyboard reprogrammed; must be set.
Select 630
Pr630
confirm 0
7
Pr630
Press <Enter>. _____
The function is active.
{
50 Press any key,e.g.<PLU
50>.
The function code of this Pr630
key is displayed. 32817
Enter new function

code,e.g.<33281> for Pr630
Fixed tare 2. 33281
Press <Enter>.
The new key function is
saved.
Another key can be Pr630
modified. _____
Press <Mod>. The menu is exited.

_______________________________________________________________________
- The function code of reserved keys, e.g. <Mod>; <ESC>; <C> etc.
is not displayed and cannot be modified.
- If <00000> is entered instead of a function code, the standard
function code becomes active.
- In menu 630, all keys are reset to the standard function code by
pressing <CTRL> and <9>.
_______________________________________________________________________
7 - 156 6.111.98.5.01.18
Overview of keyboard function codes
Code Function
12 Paper feed
32768 - 33023 Direct PLU key 1 - 256
33024 - 33039 Direct operator key 1 - 16
33280 - 33283 Fixed tare key 1 - 4
33344 VAT key 1
33345 VAT key 2
33346 VAT key 3
33347 VAT key 4
33348 VAT key 5 7
33538 Tare
33539 Subtotal
33540 Total
33541 Constant
33542 Manual
33543 Minus
33544 Cancellation
33546 Multiplication
33548 Switch from PLU input to price input
33580 Set scale to zero
33588 Operator tare
33589 Save operator tare
34066 Date key
34069 Print key
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 157
7.21.15 Keyboard selection .......................................................... Pr631
Select 631
confirm
Pr631
Enter selection 03
00= 84-keyboard standard
01= 84-keyboard with 24 self-service frame
02= 84-keyboard with 30-front foil
7 03= 84-keyboard reprogrammed. (e.g. keyboard changes from host)
Depending on the country, additional settings can be made for the 500 version.
10= Standard 84-keyboard with additional 48-keyboard
11= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with additional 48-keyboard
13= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additional 48-keyboard
23= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additional 96-keyboard
confirm
Keyboards, see page 5 - 7
7 - 158 6.111.98.5.01.18
7.21.16 RAM clearing .................................................................... Pr 666
Select 666
confirm Pr666
00
Pr666
Enter 81 81
7
confirm
RAM is cleared
_______________________________________________________________________
The following settings remain even after the RAM clearing:
- Communication settings in Pr 600
- Printer settings in Pr 710
- Machine ID Pr 605
- Commissioning (memory management). The values set in Pr 606
are applied.
_______________________________________________________________________
7.21.17 Entering password for menu ........................................... Pr 690
Select 690
PASS
confirm
PASS
Enter password 000000
000000 = Password is deactivated
XXXXXX= Enter 6 numbers
confirm
Password entry is activated.
If you forget your password, please contact Bizerba Service.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 159
7.21.18 Second currency exchange rate (Euro) setting .............. Pr 695
Select 695
confirm
Pr695
Enter submenu 01
Submenu overview:
01= Change main currency to second currency (Euro)
7 02= Convert PLU price into EURO
confirm
Changing main currency to second currency (Euro)

Submenu 01
Pr695
0= Main currency in old local currency
1= Main currency in new local currency
confirm
Converting PLU price into EURO

Submenu 02
_______________________________________________________________________
This function can only be executed if the old local currency is still
active.
The sales are not converted. Sales should be deleted.
_______________________________________________________________________
Pr695
02 1
confirm
The prices are converted and the second currency is then changed to
automatically.
7 - 160 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
7.22 Service menu Pr 7--
_______________________________________________________________________
Test print Pr 700
Print boot log information Pr 701
Print fonts Pr702
Print menu settings Pr703
Print weighing system information Pr 704
Printer settings Pr 710
DisplayADC programming version Pr 712 7
Display load cell type Pr 715
Program version Pr 716
Display battery voltage Pr717
Display test Pr718
Logbook monitoring Pr 730
_______________________________________________________________________
7.22.1 Test printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 700
Select 700
confirm
confirm
Fig. 100: Test printing
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 161
Service Pr 7--
7.22.2 Printing boot log information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 701
Select 701
confirm
confirm
7
Fig. 101: Example of log information
7 - 162 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
7.22.3 Printing fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr702
Select 702 Pr702

confirm 1
Print with ticket paper

confirm
All fonts are printed. 7
Print with labels
confirm
The first 4 fonts are printed.
Fig. 102: Font types
confirm
The next 4 fonts are printed.
Press the <Total> key as often as required until all font types have been printed.
7.22.4 Printing menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr703
Select 703
Pr703
confirm 0
confirm
The current menu settings are being printed.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 163
Service Pr 7--
7.22.5 Printing weighing system information ............................ Pr 704
Select 704 Pr704

confirm 0
confirm
Weighing system information is printed.
7
Fig. 103: Weighing system

information
7 - 164 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
7.22.6 Printer settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 710
Select 710
confirm
Pr710
Enter submenu 01
confirm
Submenu overview: 7
01 = Feed for labels (+/- 1.5mm)
02= Move print format on the label (+/- 1.5mm)
03= Correct ticket feed (+/- 2.5mm)
04= Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket
Feed for labels

Submenu 01
Pr710
00-1 1= minus infeed
12= Standard settings
13-24 = plus infeed
confirm
Moving print format on the label

Submenu 02
Pr710
00-1 1= minus infeed
13-24 = plus infeed
confirm
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 165
Service Pr 7--
Correcting ticket feed
Submenu 03
Pr710
00-19 = minus infeed
21-40 = plus infeed
confirm
7
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket
In the case of printers with light barriers (label printer) this is where sensitivity for
paper-end detection is set.
When the end of the paper is reached, printing is automatically interrupted and the display
shows the message ”PAPER END”.
Submenu 04
Pr710
00= End of paper detection off
40= Standard
increasingly insensitive
..
99= insensitive
confirm
Changing print intensity

Legibility of rotated barcodes can be improved by reducing the print intensity.
Submenu 05
Pr710
0= no reduction
1= Reduce print intensity by 10%
confirm
7 - 166 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
7.22.7 Displaying ADC programming version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 712
Select 712
confirm
Pr712
6026500004
7
7.22.8 Displaying load cell type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 715
Select 715
confirm
Pr715
Cod 150502 1
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 167
Service Pr 7--
7.22.9 Displaying program version ............................................ Pr 716
Select 716
confirm
Pr716
Enter submenu 01
confirm
7 Submenu overview:
01= Main program version number
02= Bootloader version number
03= Option resource version number
04= Layout resource version number
05= Menu resource version number
06= Text resource version number
07= Keyboard resource version number
08= Font resource version number
09= Software version number (SAP number)
Main program version number Pr716

Submenu 01 01 00661117100140
Bootloader version number Pr716
Submenu 02 02 00061119500110
Option resource version number Pr716
Submenu 03 03 00161117200140
Layout resource version number Pr716
Submenu 04 04 00061117300150
Menu resource version number Pr716
Submenu 05 05 00061117400140
Text resource version number Pr716
Submenu 06 06 00061117500130
Keyboard resource version number Pr716
Submenu 07 07 00061117600110
Font resource version number Pr716
Submenu 08 08 00061117700120
Software version number Pr716
Submenu 09 09 61117000140
7 - 168 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
7.22.10 Displaying battery voltage ............................................... Pr 717
Select 717
Pr717
confirm 1
Pr717
confirm
12,218
_______________________________________________________________________
7
If the scale is connected to the mains, the supply voltage
(approx. 12 V) is displayed.
- Disconnect scale from mains supply!
The battery voltage is displayed.
_______________________________________________________________________
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 169
Service Pr 7--
7.22.11 Display test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr 718
Select 718
confirm
Pr718
1
confirm
The display shows all figures and symbols.
7
Fig. 104: Display test

Close display test
7 - 170 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
7.22.12 Logbook control Pr 730
In menu Pr 730, Welmec information from the logbook can be queried.

Select 730
confirm
Pr730
Enter submenu
01
01= Display logbook
02= Print logbook
7
confirm
Display logbook
Submenu 01
Step 1 Software identification number. (Software ID)
Accessing information
Entries from installation are displayed in three steps.

Consecutive number of log book entry,
Department number,
Component number.
Version number of the loaded software.
Date and time of download.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 171
Service Pr 7--
Example: Accessing logbook entries

Pr
Press key<Mod>.
Press the keys <7> <3> <0> on Pr730

10-digit keyboard.
Pr730
Press <Enter> key 01 1
Pr730
7
Press <Enter> key 01 1
Press key Enter<>.

for step 1 Pr730
1 Software ID A10F 002 0200
2 Version number of legally relevant part 1 2 3
3 Version number of legally non-relevant part
Press key Enter < for further steps.>
Pr730
9 20 12
1 Serial number of the entry
2 Department number 1 2 3
3 Component number
Pr730
A10F 002 0200
1 Software ID
2 Version number of legally relevant part 1 2 3
3 Version number of legally non-relevant part
Pr730
140910 1058
1 Date DDMMYY
2 Time 1 2
7 - 172 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Pr 7--
If there are further entries in the logbook, the next entry is displayed.
Pr730
8 20 12
2 Department number 1 2 3
3 Component number
Pr730
bc 01 001 0170
1 Version number of the loaded software
1 7
Pr730
090410 1432
1 Date
2 Time 1 2
Hold down the <Enter> key until all logbook entries are displayed.
Once all entries are displayed, the scale shows the next submenu.
Pr730
02
Print logbook
Requirement
- Receipt paper is in the printer.
- Pr 505 -0 Ticket paper
Submenu 02
confirm
Logbook is printed.
2 Department number
3 Component number
4 Version number of the loaded software
5 Date
6 Time
1 2 3 4 5 6
Fig. 105: Logbook printout
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 173
Programming overview
7.23 Programming overview
Menus marked with an asterisk *, sub. (submenus) or settings are not available for all
country versions.
PLU maintenance Menu Sub. see page

Define PLU Enter PLU number Pr 110 7 - 43
Unit price 01 7 - 44
Product group 02 7 - 44
Tare 03 7 - 44
7 Use-by date 04 7 - 45
Barcode for article 05 7 - 45
Price overwrite 06 7 - 46
0= not permissible
1= permissible
Article type 07 7 - 46
0= weighed
1= manual
2= minus
3= By count (price refers to pieces per package)
4= Fixed weight
5= By count fixed weight (fixed weight and price refer to
pieces per package)
Weight class 08 7 - 47
0= Unit price related to 1kg or 1 lb
1= Unit price related to 100g or 1/4 lb
Data of origin 09 7 - 47
0= without data of origin
Enter PLU product text 10 7 - 47
(PLU number 0001-9999)
Traceability text (number 9900-9999)
Supplementary text XX - YYYYYYYYY 11 7 - 48
XX= Supplementary text 01-04
YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200
Supplementary text for BLD text fields XX - 12 7 - 48
YYYYYYYYY
XX= Supplementary text 01-10
YYYYYYYYY= Text number from Pr 200
Logo printing in BLD logo fields 1 - 3 13 7 - 49
7 - 174 6.111.98.5.01.18
PLU maintenance Menu Sub. see page

Pieces per package for the By Count operating modes Pr 110 14 7 - 49
00 to 99
Unit price back-calculation 15 7 - 50
0= without back calculation
1= with back-calculation (the unit price per piece or for
fixed weight per kg is calculated)
Mandatory input of pieces 16 7 - 50
0= no mandatory input
7
Fixed weight 00000-99999 17 7 - 50
Fixed weight mode 18 7 - 50
(A second representation is also printed in brackets)
0= Standard
1= lbs (g)
2= oz (lbs)
3= oz (g)
4= lbs (oz)
Mandatory input of fixed weight 19 7 - 51
0= no mandatory input
Assign VAT number to a PLU 1-5 20 7 - 51
VAT can be overwritten 21 7 - 51
0= cannot be overwritten
1= can be overwritten
Tare % 000.00 (dependent on country) 22 7 - 52
Print PLU (article) lists Pr 115 7 - 53
Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with all product lines 01 7 - 53
Print from xxxxxx to yyyyyy with only the first product line 02 7 - 53
Delete single PLUs (article) Pr 120 7 - 54
Delete PLUs (article) from xxxxxx to yyyyyy Pr 121 7 - 54
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 175
Data maintenance Menu Sub. see page

Supplement. texts enter text number 1-999999999 Pr 200 7 - 55
Create supplementary text
Create header and footer texts Pr 201 7 - 56
Enter text number 01-99
Create header and footer texts
Define scrolling message Pr 202 7 - 57
Enter text number 01-99
7 Print texts Pr 205 7 - 58
Print supplementary texts 01
Print header and footer texts 02
Print scrolling message 03
Delete texts Pr 206 7 - 59
Delete single supplementary text 01
Delete all supplementary texts 02
Delete header and footer texts 03
Delete scrolling message text 04 7 - 60
Define barcode structure Pr 210 7 - 61
Barcode format 01
Code constant 02 7 - 62
Numerical codes 03 7 - 62
Check and adopt code structure 04 7 - 64
Managing barcode structures Pr 211 7 - 65
Print code structures 01 7 - 65
Delete code structures 02 7 - 65
Code structure number for all PLUs 03 7 - 66
Module width for barcode in 0º and 180º position 04 7 - 66
Module width for barcode in 90º and 270º position 05 7 - 66
7 - 176 6.111.98.5.01.18

Non-PLU settings Pr 215 7 - 67
Sell-by date for non-programmed articles 01 7 - 67
(non-PLU)
Barcode for Non-PLU weighed articles 02 7 - 68
Barcode for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece 03 7 - 68
goods)
Barcode for non-PLU minus products 04 7 - 68
Barcode for total 05 7 - 68
7
Product group for non-PLU weighed 06 7 - 69
Product group for non-PLU non-weighed articles (piece 07 7 - 69
goods)
Product groups for non-PLU minus articles 08 7 - 69
VAT for non-PLU weighed 09 7 - 70
VAT for non-PLU non-weighed products (piece goods) 10 7 - 70
VAT for non-PLU minus articles 11 7 - 70
Define PLU number for non-PLU article 99 7 - 70
Print BLD label list/ logo list Pr 220 7 - 71
Print BLD label list 01
Print logos 02
Delete BLD labels/logos Pr 225
Delete BLD label list from - to 01 7 - 72
Delete BLD logos from - to 02 7 - 72
Define VAT Pr 230 7 - 72
Enter VAT number 1-5
VAT set 0-99,99 01 7 - 73
VAT inclusive or exclusive 02 7 - 73
0= VAT inclusive (gross prices)
1= VAT exclusive (net prices)
VAT text, 20 characters possible 03
Manage VAT Pr 231 7 - 74
Print list with VAT rates 0 01
Delete VAT sets 1...5 - 1...5 02
Use VAT: 03
0= Use VAT from PLU and non-PLU
1-5 = Use VAT for all articles
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 177

Configure report layout Pr 300 7 - 75
Print prices 01 7 - 75
0= Prices are not printed
1= Prices are printed
Print PLUs without sales 02 7 - 75
0= PLUs without sales are not printed
1= PLUs without sales are printed
Printcustomer name for PLU report 03 7 - 75
7 00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number
Print customer name for product group report 04
00= Standard name; 01-99 = Text number
Print customer name for operator report 05
Print customer name for total sales per scale and per 06
operator report
Print customer name for data of origin report 07
Print customer name for VAT report 08
7 - 178 6.111.98.5.01.18

Print reports on ticket Pr 310 7 - 77
Scale report 01 7 - 77
PLU report with one article text line 02 7 - 77
PLU report with all article text lines 03 7 - 78
0= Print report, no delete 7
Product group report 04 7 - 79
Operator report 05 7 - 80
Traceability data - sales report with one traceability text 06 7 - 81
line
Traceability data - sales report with all traceability text 07 7 - 81
lines
VAT sales report 08 7 - 82
Print report on label Pr 311 7 - 82
Print scale total sales 01 7 - 82
Display / delete sales Pr 320 7 - 83
Display scale total sales 01 7 - 83
Delete scale total sales 02 7 - 83
Delete journal from device 90= delete 99 7 - 83
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 179
Configuration Menu Sub. see page

Set date and time Pr 500 7 - 84
Setting date 01 7 - 85
Setting time 02 7 - 85
Print year either 2 or 4-digital 03 7 - 85
Date representation variants 04 7 - 86
00= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.06
7 01= Day-month-year alphanumeric e.g 21.07.06
02= Day-month alphanumeric e.g 21 July
03= Month-year alphanumeric e.g July06
04= Month Day Year American numeric
05= Month Day Year American alphanumeric
06= Year month day Hungarian numeric
07= Year month day Hungarian alphanumeric
08= Day-month-year numeric e.g 21.07.06
09= Day month year alphanumeric e.g. 21 July 06
Set main operating mode Pr 510 7 - 87
Select main operating mode 01 7 - 87
Select layout 02 7 - 87
1= Label layout
Addition of customer total 03 7 - 88

0 = without addition of customer total
1 = with addition of customer total
Select paper type 04 7 - 88
0= Ticket paper
7 - 180 6.111.98.5.01.18

Set switching operating mode Pr 511 7 - 89
Select switching operating mode 01 7 - 89
Select layout 02 7 - 89
1= Label layout 7
Addition of customer total 03 7 - 90
0 = without addition of customer total
1 = with addition of customer total
Select paper type 04 7 - 90
0= Ticket paper
Settings for different operating modes Pr 515 7 - 90
Automatic zero setting 01 7 - 90
0= Scale is set to zero.
1= Zero setting error 115 is displayed
2= Scale is not set to zero.
Open tickets / labels 02 7 - 91
0= Open tickets are printed
after scale off/on
1= Open tickets are not printed and deleted
Origin labeling 03
0= Origin labeling off
1= Enter data of origin number manually
2= Data of origin number permanently defined
Define data of origin number 04
00-99 Use permanently defined data of origin number.
Negative customer total permitted/not permitted 05 7 - 91
0= The total cannot become negative during sale
1= the total can become negative during sale
Sales calculation 06 7 - 92
0= The sold items are not added to total memory
1= The sold items are added to total memory
Mandatory input for By count pieces 07
0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 16)
1= Mandatory input for by count piece
Mandatory input for fixed weight 08
0= Take mandatory input from PLU (Pr 110/ 19)
1= Mandatory input for fixed weight
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 181

Scrolling message setting Pr 516 7 - 93
Select scrolling message 01
00= Scrolling message not active
01-99 = Scrolling message number from Pr 202
Display on 02
0= Customer side
1= Operator side
2= Both sides
7
Activation of scrolling message 03
0= When display is occupied and empty
1= Only when display is empty
Test scrolling message 04
Settings for multi-operator mode Pr 520 7 - 94
Constant key function 01
0= Only fix the unit price during sale
1= Only fix the tare value during sale
2= Fix unit price and tare value during sale
Print article and total label 02 7 - 95
0= Print article labels and total label
2= Only print article labels
Operator items display mode 000 03 7 - 96
1= Display for sheet cancellation
1= Display after registration
1= Display for total/subtotal
Cash register functions 04
0= Cash drawer does not open
1= Cash register opens with/without sale using total and
operator key
2= Cash register opens only with sale using total and
operator key
3= Cash register opens with sale using total and operator
key
4= Cash register opens only with sale using total and
operator key
Amount tend./change operation 05 7 - 97
0= without amount tend./change operation
1= Amount tend./change operation with a currency
2= Combined amount tend./change operation in local cur‐
rency and foreign currency *
7 - 182 6.111.98.5.01.18

Talon printout Pr 520 06 7 - 97
00= without talon
01-99= with talon the entered number corresponds to
the delay time in seconds
Repeat ticket 07
0= without repeat ticket
1= with repeat ticket
Open ticket again 08
0= without ticket reopening 7
1= with ticket reopening
Print cancellation and canceled articles 09 7 - 99
0= no printout
1= with printout
Print included VAT 10 7 - 99
0= no printout
1= with printout
Print ticket after <Total> 11 7 - 99
0= Print ticket as requested with<Shift> +<OPx>)
1= Always print ticket
Setting for quick service mode Pr 521 7 - 100
0 =Article accessing via PLU-direct key, registration with
operator key.
1= Article call-up via PLU direct key, automatic recor‐
ding.
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 183

Settings for price labeling mode * Pr 525 7 - 101
Labeling mode 01
0= Label printing with sales price ”0.00” is not supported.
1= Weight labeling
Label print with selling price ”0.00” is possible.
2= Only Weight labeling
Label print with selling price ”0.00” is possible.
Multiple label printing for price per piece 02
7 00= Labels are printed one after the other
without delay.
01 - 99= Delay time in seconds. Labels
are printed consecutively with delay.
Allocate operator no. to operator keys Pr 530 7 - 103

TT-VVV
TT (keys 1-16)
VVV (operator 1-999)
7 - 184 6.111.98.5.01.18

PLU input mode and range limitation Pr 535 7 - 103
10-key keypad for unit price or PLU input 01
0 = Unit price via 10-key keypad
Switching to PLU input with shift key
1 = PLU no. input via 10-key keypad
Switching to unit price input with shift key
2= PLU no. input only via 10-key keypad
PLU input: 02 7 - 104
Number of digits for input via a 10-key keypad. 7
2= PLU input with 2 digits
PLU-direct key mode 03
0= PLU-key no. (PLU direct keyboard) corresponds to
the PLU no.
1= PLU direct keyboard is locked
2= PLU number results from the PLU key allocation, see
sub 4
PLU direct key allocation 04
XXX-YYYYYY
XXX= PLU direct key 001-246
YYYYYY= PLU number 001-999999
PLU range limitation 05 7 - 105
000001-999999
PLU call delay time 06 7 - 106
0= PLU is displayed with <Enter> or after entering all di‐
gits.
1-20 = The PLU is displayed after a delay time. 1= short
delay; 20= long delay
Print PLU direct keys Pr 536 7 - 107
Tare fixed value memory 1-4 Pr 540 7 - 108
X-YYYY
X= Direct tare key 1-4
YYYY= Assigned tare values
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 185

Rounding and price calculation settings for national Pr 545 7 - 108
currency
Rounding methods for customer total 01 7 - 109
0= no rounding
7 6= mathematical rounding to 10*
Rounding of article total 02 7 - 109

0= no rounding
Rounding for By count 03

0= mathematical
1= round up next position
7 - 186 6.111.98.5.01.18

Receipt design overview 7 - 111
Design ticket Pr 550 7 - 112
Print barcode on ticket 000 01
1= Article barcode on; 0= off
1= Total barcode on; 0= off
1= Talon barcode on; 0= off
Barcode height in mm on ticket 02 7 - 112
5-22 mm
Print tare on ticket 03 7 - 113
7
0= Do not print tare value on ticket
1= Tare value net weight is identified with N (country-de‐
pendent character)
2= Tare value on ticket net weight is not identified with N
Print header text 04
00= without header text
01-99 = Header text number
Print footer text 05
00= without footer text
01-99 = Footer text number
Foreign currency supplementary text 06 7 - 114
000000000= without foreign currency supplementary text
1-999999999 = Foreign currency supplementary text
number
Rounding supplementary text 07 7 - 114
000000000= without rounding supplementary text
1-999999999 = Rounding supplementary text number
Font change on tickets 08
000= Font from PLU
001-1 10= Defined font
Number of PLU article text lines to be printed on ticket 09
0= all article text lines are printed
1-9 = the corresponding number of lines is printed
10= text lines not printed
Ticket counter printout 10 7 - 115
0= Counter is not printed
1= Counter is printed
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 187

Print foreign currency 0000 Pr 550 11 7 - 116
1= Print conversion rate
1= Print unit price, selling price and total
1= Print selling price and total
1= Only print total
Print amount paid in/out 12 7 - 116
0= No printout
1= Printout
7
Print supplementary texts 13 7 - 116
0= No printout
1= Printout
Print header logo 14 7 - 117
0000 = No printout
Print footer logo 15 7 - 117
0= No printout
Label design - overview 7 - 118
BLD labels 7 - 119
Design label Pr 555 7 - 120
Label type 01 7 - 121
00= label from BLD
01 ... predefined label from scales
Select BLD label 02 7 - 122
Only valid if 00 stands in 555/01
1.. Select BLD label.
Label size HHH-WW 03
HHH= Label height 28-105 mm
WW= Label width 10-58 mm
Change label distance 04
8-40 dot ( 8dot= 1mm)
Packed-on and sell-by date on label 00 05 7 - 122
1= Packed-on date on; 0= off
1= Sell-by date on; 0= off
Barcode on label 00 06 7 - 123
1= Article barcode on; 0= off
1= Total barcode on; 0= off
7 - 188 6.111.98.5.01.18

Barcode height in mm Pr 555 07
5 - 22mm
Tara printout on label 08
0= without tare
1= with tare
Print header text 09 7 - 124
00= without header text
01-99 = header text number
7
Alternative text with sell-by date 10 7 - 124
000000000= No alternative text.
1-999999999 = Text number for alternative text
Logo printout 11 7 - 124
enter
0000= without logo
0001-9999 = Logo ID (print logo)
Beginning of text field 12 7 - 125
Beginning of text field in mm 11 - 84
Beginning of data field 13
Beginning of data field in mm 11 - 84
Data field monitoring 14 7 - 126
0= off
1= active
Font change on tickets 15 7 - 127
0= Font from PLU
1= fixed font
Print price frame and texts on label: 0000000 16 7 - 127
1= Print ”TARE”
1= Print ”Packed on”
1= Print ”best before”
1= Print ”Net” or ”Pcs”
1= Print ”Price”
1= Print price frame
1= Print supplementary text
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 189

Operator no., Machine ID or Check Digit on label Pr 555 17 7 - 127
0= without output
1= with operator no.
2= with machine ID
3= with digit code *
Print foreign currency: 0000 18 7 - 128
1= Print conversion rate
1= Print unit price, selling price and total
7 1= Print selling price and total
1= Only print total
Rotate label layout by 180o and reverse operation 19
11
1= Print label rotated
1= Reverse label before printing
Alternative text for packed-on date 20 7 - 130
0= Standard text from resource
1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200
Alternative text for use-by date 21 7 - 130
0= Standard text from resource
1-999999999 = Text number from Pr 200
Print units on the label 1111 22 7 - 130
1= Print price with unit
1= Print unit price with unit
1= Print weight with unit
1= Print tare with unit
Print speed for label layout 23 7 - 130
00= 44 mm/s
01= 53 mm/s (battery operation)
02= 66 mm/s
03= 88 mm/s
04= 102 mm/s (Standard)
7 - 190 6.111.98.5.01.18

Label configuration management Pr 556 7 - 131
Save configuration from 555 01
1-3 Layout memory is only possible if memory is deleted
(556 / 03)
Select label configuration 02 7 - 132
0= Standard configuration after RAM clearing
1= Configuration from memory 1
7
Delete label configuration 03
Delete memory 1-3
Foreign currency settings Pr 560 * 7 - 133
Select foreign currency function 01
0= Euro/foreign currency off
1= Euro function on
2= Foreign currency function on
Select foreign/ second currency display 02
0= Foreign currency display off
(Euro or foreign currency key non-operational)
1= Foreign currency display on
Display unit and selling price, total and/or
subtotal and total in amount tend./change operation
Foreign currency calculation method 03 7 - 134
0= Total calculated through conversion
1= Total calculated through addition of
selling price
Foreign currency symbol for ticket and label layout 04
Foreign currency symbol on label for price field 05
Decimal places in foreign currency 06
0-3 decimal places
Foreign currency factor 07 7 - 135
0-4 Factor 1 / 10 / 100 / 1000 /10000
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 191

Currency exchange rate (calculation factor) Pr 560 08
e.g. 0001.01 (national unit e.g. €)
Rounding of foreign currency 09 7 - 135
0= no rounding
7 5= mathematical rounding to 5*
Calculation of foreign currency price 10 7 - 136

0= Internal calculation in foreign currency
1= Internal calculation in national currency.
Ticket call-up data volume 111 Pr 570 7 - 136
1= Transfer of total EAN code. 0= without
1= Transfer of Item EAN code. 0= without
1= Transfer of article text. 0= without
7 - 192 6.111.98.5.01.18
Database configuration Menu Sub. see page

TCP-IP settings Pr 600 7 - 137
DHCP 01 7 - 138
0= No DHCP, use permanent IP addresses
1= Execute DHCP, address is set by DHCP server.
Display of current IP address 02
IP: IP address if no DHCP selected 03
Subnet: Subnet mask if no DHCP is selected 04
Gateway: Address of router if no DHCP is selected 05 7
DNS1: Address of domain name server 1, if no DHCP 06 7 - 139
selected
DNS2: Address of domain name server 2, if no DHCP 07
selected
Enter host name 32 ASCII characters are possible. 08
Leasing address from DHCP 09
Display current IP address Pr 601 7 - 140
Printout of communication settings Pr 602
Set scale number Pr 603
01 - 32
Set department no Pr 604
001-999
Set machine ID Pr 605 7 - 142
0001 - 9999
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 193

Commissioning (memory management). Pr 606 7 - 142
Number of PLUs 100 - 10000 01 7 - 144
Number of supplementary texts per PLU 0-4 02 7 - 144
Number of BLD text fields per PLU 00 - 10 03 7 - 144
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU 0 - 3 04 7 - 144
Number of supplementary texts 50- 3000 05 7 - 144
Number of items (ticket memory) 50- 3000 06 7 - 145
7 By count, fixed weight and VAT 0000 07 7 - 145
1= By count on; 0= off
1= Fixed weight on; 0= off
1= VAT activated; 0= deactivated
1= Tare % permitted, 0= Tare % not permitted (depen‐
dent on country)
Decimal places 08 7 - 145
0-3 = Number of decimal places
4= Standard value (dependent on country)
Expanded RAM, 0 = do not use, 1 = use 09 7 - 146
Journal function 10 7 - 146
0= Ticket journal off
1= Ticket journal on
Start commissioning 88 7 - 147
Set scale for system Pr 607 7 - 148
(as from program version 2.00)
Scale type 0= Stand alone; 1= Slave; 9= Master 01 7 - 148
Multicast IP address 02 7 - 149
Multicast IP port number 03 7 - 149
UDP port number 04 7 - 149
7 - 194 6.111.98.5.01.18

Control display lighting Pr 610 7 - 150
00= automatic display illumination off
1-99 = automatic display illumination on
Scales switch-off time Pr 615 7 - 151
1-99 in minutes
WLAN settings Pr 621
Settings 02-07 only possible
if WLAN module is switched off (Pr 621/01)
7
Module on/off 01
0= WLAN off
1= WLAN on
Time slices for WLAN on/off in a defined period of time 02
X-YYYYYYYY
X= 1-3 time slices
YYYYYYYY= Time on/off
Ping interval 03
0000= Ping off
0001-9999 = Interval between 2 pings in sec.
Start of ping interval, when WLAN on (Pr 621/01)
IP address for WLAN 000000000000 04
Test telegram to host 05
0= Transmission off
0001-9999 = Interval between 2 transmissions in sec.
IP address of telegram recipient 06
000000000000
Port number of telegram recipient 07
0001-65536 (standard= 49152)
Beeper on/off 000 Pr 622
1= Normal beeper on; 0= off
1= Acceptance beeper on; 0= off
1= Error beeper on; 0= off
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 195

Scale (display) sensitivity 0-5 Pr 625 7 - 155
0= Display sensitive
..
5= Display less sensitive against vibrations
Reconfigure keyboard Pr 630 7 - 156
Keyboard selection Pr 631 7 - 158
00= 84-keyboard standard
01= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame
7
02= 84-keyboard with 30 front foil
03= 84-keyboard, reprogrammed
11= 84-keyboard with 24-self-service frame with addi‐
tional 48-keyboard
tional 48-keyboard
13= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additio‐
nal 48-keyboard
tional 96-keyboard
tional 96-keyboard
23= Standard 84-keyboard, reprogrammed, with additio‐
nal 96-keyboard
Clear RAM Pr 666 7 - 159
81 RAM is cleared
Enter password for menu Pr 690
XXXXXX 6-digit numeric password
000000 Password is deactivated
Second currency exchange rate (Euro) settings Pr 695 7 - 160
Change main currency to second currency 01
0= Main currency in old local currency
1= Main currency in new local currency
Convert PLU price into Euro 02
7 - 196 6.111.98.5.01.18
Service Menu Sub. see page

Test printing Pr 700 7 - 161
Print boot log information Pr 701 7 - 161
Print fonts Pr 702 7 - 163
Print menu settings Pr 703 7 - 163
Print weighing system information Pr 704 7 - 164
Printer settings Pr 710 7 - 165
Infeed for labels 01
00 - 11 = minus feed 7
12 Standard settings
13-24 plus infeed
Move print format on the label 02 7 - 165
00 - 11 = minus feed
13-24 plus infeed
Correct ticket feed 03 7 - 166
00-19 minus feed
21-40 plus infeed
Sensitivity for paper end detection for ticket 04
00-99 (the higher the number, the less sensitive is detec‐
tion)
00= Paper end detection off
Change print intensity 05
0= no reduction
Display ADC program version Pr 712 7 - 167
Detailed display Pr 714
Display ADC type Pr 715 7 - 167
6.111.98.5.01.18 7 - 197
Service Menu Sub. see page

Display program version Pr 716 7 - 168
Main program Version number 01
Boot loader Version number 02
Option ressource Version number 03
Layout ressource Version number 04
Menu ressource Version number 05
Text ressource Version number 06
7 Keyboard ressource Version number 07
Font ressource Version number 08
SAP number 09
Display battery voltage Pr 717 7 - 169
Display test Pr 718 7 - 170
Logbook monitoring Pr 730 7 - 171
Display logbook 01 7 - 172
Print logbook 02 7 - 173
7 - 198 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Troubleshooting
8 Troubleshooting
You can generally eliminate the errors specified below yourself, using the described
remedy.
In the case of errors which you cannot eliminate yourself and which are not described in
this Operating Manual, please call your Bizerba customer service point.
Please provide your Bizerba customer service point with the following details:
- Device type (see type plate)
- Device no. (see type plate)
- Error description
This will facilitate preparations by customer service staff.
8
8.1 Fault description
Fault Cause Rectification

Display does not illumi‐ No supply voltage. Check and insert power cable.
nate.
Check connection plug
Check connection cable
Press On-Off key
Weight value display not Load plate not correctly posi‐ Clean load plate, position cor‐
at zero or modified. tioned or objects located on rectly and remove objects.
the load plate.
Soiling on or beneath the load

plate.
Level scale.
Scale not leveled. Switch scale off/on.
Printer will not print. Open print head. Connect print head correctly
(see page 5 - 10).
Printer jammed. Drive motor for paper trans‐ Check paper track and re‐
port overloaded or jammed. move any detached labels.
Clean printer (paper guide).
Poor receipt or label Unsuitable receipt or label pa‐ Clean thermal strip.
printing. per.
6.111.98.5.01.18 8-1
Troubleshooting Operating instruction BC II
8.2 Messages
Operating errors or faults in the electronics are indicated by ”Cod” and an error code digit.
Display
Cod 1 1 2
kg T kg Price / kg Price
Messages Cause Rectification

8
Cod 112 Movement of the scale during Do not move the scale!
start-up.
Cod 110 Scale loaded during start-up. Unload scales!

Cod 110 Scale below zero during start-‐ Fit load plate!
up.
Cod 110 Scale below zero after start-‐ Fit load plate and press <C>
up. key!
Error 073 Scale sales overflow. Print and delete sales, see
menus Pr 310, Pr 311 and Pr
320
PAPErEND End of paper insert new ticket paper or new
label roll.
incorrect setting Check setting in Pr 505.
0= Receipt paper
1=Label paper
Other error code digits --- Press <C> key or switch the
scale off and on again with the
<On-Of f> key.
8-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Maintenance
9 Maintenance
9.1 Cleaning
The cleaning instructions must be observed during installation, operation and
maintenance.
9.1.1 Cleaning device

_______________________________________________________________________
DANGER Water getting into device!
Danger of death from electric shock.
- Make sure that no water runs into the device when cleaning.
- Do not wash device off or spray-wash.
9
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
CAUTION Incorrect cleaning agents!
Damage of device surfaces.
- Do not use spirit, acetone or aggressive cleaning or scouring agents.
_______________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Switch off device before cleaning and pull out power plug.
_______________________________________________________________________
Use warm water with dish-washing detergent (food safe) for cleaning. Use a soft,
non-fraying cloth, moistened lightly.
6.111.98.5.01.18 9-1
Maintenance Operating instruction BC II
9.1.2 Cleaning the printer

Clean thermal bar
Ticket printer, label printer or Linerless printer.
The thermal printhead must be cleaned on a regular basis and as soon as you notice that
the printing quality has decreased.
_______________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION Coated thermal bar!
The thermal bar is coated with a glass passivation layer and must not
be touched or cleaned with hard objects.
Use Bizerba cleaning products to clean the thermal bar.
_______________________________________________________________________
9 1
Open the side cover of the scale.
Open the printer cover by pulling it
upwards.
Open the printhead.
Clean the thermal bar 1 with the Bizerba
thermal printhead cleaning pen or dip a
cleaning pad in Bizerba cleaning solvent..
Afterwards, dry off with a dry cleaning
bud.
Fig. 106: Thermal bar
9-2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Clean label printer

Inspect label printer weekly for glue residue deposits on deflection pin, take-up arbor and
paper deflector and clean.
1
Clean the deflection pin and take-up pin.
Open the printer cover and printhead.
Remove the label roll.
Remove glue from parts 1 .
9
Fig. 107: Deflection pin, take-up pin
Clean paper deflector

Pull the paper deflector 2 out sideways.
Clean the paper deflector with the LR
label remover, from Bizerba.
The ”LR-label remover” may not be
used to clean thermal bars.
2
Fig. 108: Paper deflector

Push the paper deflector 2 in sideways.
6.111.98.5.01.18 9-3
9.1.3 Cleaning products for printer

Ordering information
The cleaning products can be obtained from Bizerba Service or Bizerba technical
consultants.
Cleaner for thermal bar
Cleaning pen 12ml
Order no.: 5077 7050000
or
9
Aerosol can, 200ml
Order no.: 9400 8900133
Thermal bar cleaning set

consisting of:
5 cleaning buds made of wood with leather
coating
1 pcs. IPA cleaning solvent 12 ml
Order no.: 9400 8919 000
Moisten the tip of the cleaning bud with a

few drops of the cleaning solvent.
Clean the thermal bar immediately with
cleaning bud.
9-4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Cleaner for residues of glue from labels

_______________________________________________________________________
ATTENTION Thermal bar coating and rubber rollers!
Damage to the coating
- Do not use label remover for cleaning thermal bar and
rubber-covered roll!
_______________________________________________________________________
Label remover
Aerosol can, 200ml
Order no.: 9594 3000000
9
6.111.98.5.01.18 9-5
9.2 Maintenance
The load plate must be removed every 4 weeks and loose dirt removed with a brush or
vacuum cleaner.
Replace the load plate and check the zero point of the scale. Switch the scale off and on if
necessary.
9.2.1 Testing the weight display

Place reference weight of 2x3 kg on the scale and read off the display at 3 and 6kg.
This test must be repeated at regular intervals.
9.2.2 Note on storing thermal paper

Store unprinted thermal paper without direct light exposure to light (original packaging) in
9 closed box or similar, if possible. It keeps its printability for up to 5 years if stored at max.
60 oC and at a max. of 65% relative air humidity.
Printed thermal paper is readable for up to 10 years if not exposed to direct sunlight and if
kept at temperatures up to a maximum of 30 o C and at a maximum of 65% relative air
humidity.
9.2.3 Ticket, label and Linerless rollers

To avoid faults in the device, only ticket and label rolls may be used that have been
checked and approved by Bizerba.These ticket and label rollers are identified with a
corresponding number.
We are not liable for damage/faults that are produced from using ticket and label rolls that
have not been checked and approved by Bizerba.
Therefore, please order ticket, labels and Linerless rolls only at a Bizerba sales agent near
you:
Bizerba GmbH & Co. KG
Papier und Etiketten
Harpener Hellweg 31
44805 Bochum 1
Germany
Phone: +49 234 / 9557-0
FAX: +49 234 / 5070247
9-6 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Technical data
10 Technical data
10.1 Dimensions
Scale BC II 800
L Length: 342 mm
W Width: 462 mm
H Overall height: 90 mm
H1
H1 Complete height: 512 mm
H
W
L 10
Fig. 109: BC II 800
Scale BC II 100
L Length: 360 mm
W Width: 432 mm
H
H Overall height: 174 mm
W
L
Fig. 110: BC II 100

Scale BC II 200
L Length: 360 mm
W Width: 487 mm
H Overall height: H1
174 mm
H1 Complete height: 461 mm
H
W
L
Fig. 111: BC II 200
6.111.98.5.01.18 10 - 1
Technical data Operating instruction BC II
10.2 Power supply

The electrical power supply must comply with the national requirements and tolerances.
Technical data for the mains power supply

Mains supply
Single-phase A.C. voltage, see data on type plate.
Permissible mains voltage tolerance (steady-state) normal:
+6% to -10% of nominal value
Supply frequency:
50/60 Hz
Permissible tolerance of mains frequency:
+2% to -2%
Permissible nonlinear distortion factor of supply voltage
x 5%
Protective conductor leakage current max.:
3.5 mA
10
10.3 Environmental conditions

The following conditions must always be observed when using electronic retail scales,
POS terminals, weighing and EDP systems, recording equipment and similar devices,
equipment combinations and spare parts.
For other manufacturers' equipment included in our scope of supply, the respective
manufacturer's regulations take preference if they deviate from our conditions.
Threshold values
Device family Protection Temperature Relative humidity%

type in oC Celsius
accordanc (degF Fahrenheit)
e with Operation Storage Operation Storage
IP min. max. min. max. min. max. min.max. 1
+15 +30 -10 +43
EDP systems: 20 8 80 20 80
(+60) (+87) (+14) (+109)
-10 +40 -20 +60
Retail scales 20 90 90
(+14) (+104) (-4) (+140)
External devices The threshold values of the respective manufacturer apply.
1 Bedewing of equipment is not permitted
10 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Operating instruction BC II Subject index
Subject index
A EAN 13 structure example, 7 - 24
for article, 7 - 45
Addition of customer total, 7 - 88 for non-PLU, 7 - 68
Amount tend./change operation, for PLU, 7 - 45
7 - 97 for total, 7 - 68
Release printout on ticket, 7 - 116 Height on label, 7 - 123
Height on ticket, 7 - 112
Article Instore code, Examples, 7 - 24
Assign barcode, 7 - 45 Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 20, 7 - 23
Assign product group, 7 - 44 Instore code EAN 8, 7 - 25
Assign supplementary text, 7 - 48 manage, 7 - 65
Data of origin, 7 - 47 Manufacturer code EAN 8, 7 - 19
define, 7 - 43 Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 18
Define article tare, 7 - 44 Overview, 7 - 16
Define unit price, 7 - 44 Print barcode structure, 7 - 65
delete, 7 - 54 Print code structure, 7 - 65
Enter sell-by date, 7 - 45 Print code structures, 7 - 7
Overwrite unit price, 7 - 46 print on label, 7 - 123
Print article label, 7 - 95 print on ticket, 7 - 112
Print list, 7 - 53 11
Report, 7 - 78 Basic price, programming, 7 - 44
Rounding of article total, 7 - 109 Beeper, on/off, 7 - 154
Text, 7 - 47
BLD
Type, 7 - 46
BLD label list, 7 - 7, 7 - 71
Weight class, 7 - 47
BLD logo fields, 7 - 49
Article maintenance, 7 - 42 Delete BLD labels, 7 - 72
Define PLU, 7 - 43 Delete BLD logos, 7 - 72
Assign VAT, to PLU, 7 - 38 Label example, 7 - 119
Number of BLD logo fields per PLU,
Assisted sale with labels, 6 - 30 7 - 144
Assisted sales with ticket, 6 - 25 Number of BLD text fields per PLU,
7 - 144
Automatic zero setting, 7 - 90
Select BLD labels, 7 - 122
Supplementary text for BLD text fields,
B 7 - 48
BLD (Bizerba Label Designer), 7 - 7,
Back-calculation, 7 - 50 7 - 48
Barcode, 7 - 16 By Count fixed weight, 7 - 50
Assign Code 128, 7 - 31 Create, 7 - 36
Barcode structure example for Code Mandatory input of pieces, 6 - 43
128, 7 - 29
Overview, 7 - 36
Barcode structure example, EAN 13,
7 - 22 By-Count
Check and adopt code structure, 7 - 64 Back-calculation, 7 - 50
Code 128, 7 - 26 Create, 7 - 34
Code structure for all PLUs, 7 - 66 Database configuration, 7 - 33
Define barcode structure, 7 - 61 Fixed weight mode, 7 - 50
Define structure, 7 - 61 Mandatory input, 7 - 50, 7 - 92
Delete code structure, 7 - 65 Overview, 7 - 33
6.111.98.5.01.18 11 - 1
Subject index Operating instruction BC II
Piece goods, 7 - 33 Customer total

Addition, 7 - 88, 7 - 90
negative, 7 - 91
C Rounding, 7 - 109
Cancellation, 6 - 12
Cash register D
Cash register drawer, 6 - 45
Cash register function, 7 - 96 Data field monitoring, 7 - 126
Connect cash drawer, 4 - 4 Data of origin, 7 - 47
Change line, 7 - 11 automatic traceability no., 7 - 32
Manual input, 7 - 32
Check digit, print on label, 7 - 127 Sales report, 7 - 81
Clean label printer, 9 - 3 Date, Representation, 7 - 86
Cleaning, 9 - 1 Date / time, set, 7 - 84, 7 - 85
Cleaning printer, 9 - 2 Decimal places, 7 - 145
Cleaning products, 9 - 4 delete
clear Header and footer texts, 7 - 59
RAM, 7 - 159 Supplementary texts, 7 - 59
11 Tare , 6 - 22 Delete memory, 7 - 159
Clear RAM, 7 - 159 Department number, 7 - 141
Code 128, 7 - 26 Designation label, 2 - 2
Assign Code 128, 7 - 31
Operating procedure for structure Device types, 2 - 1
creation, 7 - 28 Direct keys, 7 - 104
Structure example, 7 - 27, 7 - 29 Display, 5 - 2
Commissioning, 4 - 8, 7 - 137 Control lighting, 7 - 150
Memory management, 7 - 142 Icons, 5 - 2
Number of items (ticket memory), Display ADC program version, 7 - 167
7 - 145
Number of supplementary texts, Display battery voltage, 7 - 169
7 - 144 Display program version, 7 - 168
Set DHCP, 7 - 138
Set number of PLUs, 7 - 144 Display test, 7 - 170
Set TCP-IP, 7 - 137 Display the load cell type, 7 - 167
start, 7 - 147
Conditions for the place of E
installation, 4 - 1
Configuration, 7 - 84 EAN 13, 7 - 20
Allocate EAN 13, 7 - 23
Constant, 6 - 14, 7 - 94 Example of structure definition, 7 - 22
Continuous operation, 7 - 39 Structure example, 7 - 21
Multicast IP address, 7 - 149 EAN 8, 7 - 25
Multicast port number, 7 - 149 Structure example, 7 - 25
Overview, 7 - 39
Scale type, 7 - 148 End of label, 5 - 12
UDP port number, 7 - 149 End of ticket paper, 5 - 11
11 - 2 6.111.98.5.01.18
Environmental conditions, 10 - 2 Print list, 7 - 58

Explanation of symbols, 1 - 2 print on label, 7 - 124
print on ticket, 7 - 113
F I
Fixed weight
Back-calculation, 7 - 50 Initial display, 7 - 1
Create, 7 - 35 Initial setting, 7 - 4
Overview, 7 - 35 Input
Fixed weight , Database Special characters, 7 - 12
configuration, 7 - 33 Text, 7 - 10, 7 - 11
Font Insert ticket roll , 5 - 11
Change on label, 7 - 127 Install label roll, 5 - 12
change on ticket, 7 - 115
Installation, 4 - 1
Font type, change, 7 - 10
Instore code EAN 13, 7 - 20
Footer text
create, 7 - 56 Instore code EAN 8, 7 - 25
delete, 7 - 59 IP address
Print list, 7 - 58 Display, 7 - 138, 7 - 140 11
print on ticket, 7 - 113 set, 7 - 138
Foreign currency Items operator display, 7 - 96
Calculation method, 7 - 134
Currency exchange rate, 7 - 135
Currency factor, 7 - 135 J
Currency symbol, 7 - 134
Journal, delete, 7 - 83
Decimal places, 7 - 134
print on label, 7 - 128 Journal function, 7 - 146
Print supplementary text on ticket,
7 - 114
Rounding, 7 - 135 K
Second currency display, 7 - 133 Key functions, 5 - 4
Select function, 7 - 133
Settings, 7 - 133 Keyboard, 5 - 3, 5 - 4
Translation rule, 7 - 136 Functions, 5 - 4
Keyboard, 5 - 4
Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3
G Keyboard selection, 7 - 158
General operating mode settings, Keys
7 - 90 Function code table, 7 - 157
Guidelines, 2 - 4 Modify function, 7 - 156
Konformitätserklärung, 3, 5
H
Header and footer text list, 7 - 5
L
Header text Label, 5 - 12
create, 7 - 56 Barcode printout, 7 - 123
delete, 7 - 59 Change font, 7 - 127
6.111.98.5.01.18 11 - 3
Data field monitoring, 7 - 126 Header and footer text list, 7 - 5,

Delete configuration, 7 - 132 7 - 58
Label distance, 7 - 122 Logo list, 7 - 8
Label height, 7 - 122 Menu settings, 7 - 163
Print article label, 7 - 95 PLU (articles), 7 - 5
Print speed, 7 - 130 PLU article list, 7 - 53
Print total label, 7 - 95 PLU direct keys, 7 - 6, 7 - 107
Release printing of: Supplementary text list, 7 - 6, 7 - 58
Alternative text sell-by date, 7 - 124 Weighing system information, 7 - 164
Barcode, 7 - 123 Logbook monitoring, 7 - 171
Check digit, 7 - 127
Foreign currency, 7 - 128 Logo
Header text, 7 - 124 BLD, 7 - 49
Logo, 7 - 124 delete, 7 - 71
Machine ID, 7 - 127 Print list, 7 - 71
Operator No., 7 - 127
Packed-on and sell-by date, 7 - 122
Price range and texts, 7 - 127
M
Tare, 7 - 123 Machine ID
Saving the configuration, 7 - 131 print on label, 7 - 127
Select configuration, 7 - 132 set, 7 - 142
11 Set barcode height, 7 - 123
Main operating mode, 7 - 4, 7 - 87
Set beginning of data field, 7 - 125
select, 7 - 87
Set beginning of text field, 7 - 125
Set feed, 7 - 165 Mains supply, 3 - 2, 4 - 3
Label design, Overview, 7 - 118 Maintenance, 9 - 1, 9 - 6
Label type, 7 - 121 Manual input, 6 - 10
Labeling mode, 7 - 101 Manufacturer code EAN 8, 7 - 19
Labels Manufacturer code WAN 13, 7 - 18
Configuration, 7 - 120 Membrane keyboard, 5 - 3
Delete BLD labels, 7 - 72
Memory management, 7 - 142
Move print format, 7 - 165
Multi- printing, 6 - 8, 6 - 9 Menu call-up, 7 - 2
Multiple printing, 7 - 102 Menu password, 7 - 1, 7 - 159
Price labeling mode, 6 - 7
Price labeling mode , 6 - 6 Minus amount, 6 - 11
Print BLD label list, 7 - 71 Multiple operator mode, 7 - 94
Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2
Rotated layout, 7 - 128
Self-service mode, 6 - 3 Multiplication
Minus amount, 6 - 11
Leveling of scale, 4 - 2 PLU price per piece, 6 - 17
Lists Price per piece manual input, 6 - 10
Barcode structures, 7 - 7, 7 - 65
BLD label list, 7 - 7
Communication settings, 7 - 140 N
Delete header and footer text list, Negative customer total, 7 - 91
7 - 59
Delete supplementary text list, 7 - 59
11 - 4 6.111.98.5.01.18
Network Payment in/out, 6 - 45

Display IP address, 7 - 140 Place of installation, 4 - 1
Settings, 7 - 137
PLU, 5 - 5
Non-PLU, Settings, 7 - 67 -Overwrite unit price, 6 - 17
Numerical codes , 7 - 62 Assign barcode, 7 - 45
Assign product group, 7 - 44
Assign supplementary text, 7 - 48
O call, 6 - 15
define, 7 - 43
Operating conditions, 2 - 5
Define PLU tare, 7 - 44
Operating options delete, 7 - 54
Labels multi-printing/fixed weight, 6 - 9 Direct key allocation, 7 - 104
Multi- printing of labels, 6 - 8 Direct key mode, 7 - 104
Multiple-operator mode, 6 - 2 Enter number of digits, 7 - 104
Overview, 6 - 2 Enter sell-by date, 7 - 45
Price labeling mode, 6 - 6, 6 - 7 Input mode, 7 - 103
Quick-service mode, 6 - 4 Input with 10-key keypad, 6 - 16
Self-service mode, 6 - 3 Number of BLD logo fields per PLU,
Operational safety, 3 - 2 7 - 144
Number of BLD text fields per PLU,
Operator 7 - 144 11
Keys, 7 - 103 Number of digits for input, 7 - 104
Number, 7 - 127 Number of supplementary texts per
Report, 7 - 80 PLU, 7 - 144
Operator report, 7 - 80 Overwrite unit price, 7 - 46
Operator tare, 6 - 23 PLU text, 7 - 47
call up value saved, 6 - 24 Print direct keys, 7 - 107
save value entered, 6 - 23 Print direct keys list, 7 - 6
save weighed value, 6 - 23 Print list, 7 - 53
Range limitation, 7 - 105
Origin labeling, 7 - 91 registration, 6 - 17
Define data of origin number, 7 - 91 Report, 7 - 78
PLU data of origin, 7 - 47 Set number, 7 - 144
Overview of list, 7 - 5 Tare , 6 - 22
Weight class, 7 - 47
Overwrite unit price, 6 - 17
PLU
Configuration, 7 - 104
P Define unit price, 7 - 44
Packed-on date PLU list, 7 - 5
Alternative text, 7 - 130 PLU number, for Non-PLU, 7 - 70
print on label, 7 - 122
Power supply, 10 - 2
Paper , Label printer, 5 - 13
Price calculation, 7 - 108
Paper end detection, 7 - 166
Price labeling mode, 6 - 6, 6 - 7,
Paper feed, Label printer in BC II 800, 7 - 101
Ticket paper, 5 - 11
Price overwrite, 6 - 17, 7 - 46
Paper type, 7 - 88, 7 - 90
Price per piece manual input, 6 - 10
Password, 7 - 1, 7 - 159
6.111.98.5.01.18 11 - 5
Print boot log information, 7 - 162 Operator, 7 - 80

Print communication settings, 7 - 140 PLU products, 7 - 78
Product groups, 7 - 79
Print direct keys list, 7 - 6 Sales by data of origin, 7 - 81
Print fonts, 7 - 163 Scales, 7 - 77
Print logbook, 7 - 173 VAT report, 7 - 82
Reverification, 2 - 3
Print menu settings, 7 - 163
Weighing system information, 7 - 164 Rounding, 7 - 108
By count, 7 - 110
Print speed, 7 - 130
Foreign currency, 7 - 135
Print supplement. text list, 7 - 6 Supplementary text, 7 - 114
Print weighing system information,
7 - 164
S
Printer, 5 - 8
Printer lid and side cover for BC II 800 , Safety instructions, 3 - 1
5-9 Sales
Printer lid BC II 100/200 , 5 - 8 delete, 7 - 83
Side cover BC II 100/ 200, 5 - 8 display, 7 - 83
test, 7 - 161 print on label, 7 - 82
11 Thermal print head, 5 - 10 Sales calculation, 7 - 92
Printer settings, 7 - 165 Sales calculation, Release addition,
Change print intensity , 7 - 166 7 - 92
Printing head, open/close, 5 - 10 Scale
Product group, for non-PLU, 7 - 69 Payment in/out, 6 - 45
Product group report, 7 - 79 Sensitivity, 7 - 155
Turn-of f time, 7 - 151
Product groups, for PLU, 7 - 44 with cash drawer, 6 - 45
Product with data of origin, 6 - 46 Scale number, 7 - 140
Programming overview, 7 - 174 Scale switch-off time, 7 - 151
Scales network, Continuous
Q operation, 7 - 39
Scales reports, 7 - 77
Quick service mode, 7 - 100
Scroll function, 6 - 13
Quick-service mode, 6 - 4
Scrolling message
activate, 7 - 93
R Define text, 7 - 57
Delete text, 7 - 60
RAM, use, 7 - 146 select, 7 - 93
Range limitation, 7 - 105 Select display location, 7 - 93
Receipt, Correct feed, 7 - 166 Settings, 7 - 93
test, 7 - 94
Rechargeable battery, 4 - 6
Icons, 4 - 7 Scrolling messages
activating, 7 - 15
Reports, 7 - 75 Define text, 7 - 15
Customer name for reports, 7 - 76 print, 7 - 6
on label, 7 - 82
on ticket, 7 - 77
11 - 6 6.111.98.5.01.18
Second currency, 7 - 160 Special characters, 7 - 12

Change main currency, 7 - 160 Standards, 2 - 4
Convert PLU price, 7 - 160
Subtotal, 6 - 14
Select layout
Label layout, 7 - 87, 7 - 89 Supplementary text
Ticket layout, 7 - 87, 7 - 89 for BLD text fields, 7 - 48
for PLU, 7 - 48
Self-service mode, 6 - 3
Supplementary texts
Sell-by date, 7 - 45 create, 7 - 55
Alternative text on label, 7 - 124 delete, 7 - 59
for non-PLU, 7 - 67 print, 7 - 58
Print on label, 7 - 122
Print texts, 7 - 127 Supply voltage , 3 - 2, 4 - 3
Sensitivity, of the scale, 7 - 155 Switch off, 6 - 1
Service menu, 7 - 161 Switch on, 6 - 1
Set width of paper , 5 - 13 Switching operating mode, 7 - 89
select, 7 - 89
Settings
Date, 7 - 85 Switching operation mode, 7 - 4
Date representation, 7 - 86 System
Department number, 7 - 141 Continuous operation, 7 - 39 11
different operating modes, 7 - 87 Identification on system, 7 - 40
Display lighting, 7 - 150 Installation, 4 - 5
DNS1, DNS2, 7 - 139 Multicast IP address, 7 - 149
Euro, 7 - 160 Multicast port number, 7 - 149
for different operating modes, 7 - 90 Scale type, 7 - 148
Foreign currency, 7 - 133 System conditions, 7 - 40
Gateway, 7 - 138 System set-up, 7 - 40
Host name, 7 - 139 Take device out of the system, 7 - 41
IP address, 7 - 138 UDP port number, 7 - 149
Machine ID, 7 - 142
Main operating mode, 7 - 87
Multiple operator mode, 7 - 94 T
Network, 7 - 137
Talon, 6 - 26, 7 - 97
Non-PLU, 7 - 67
Price calculation, 7 - 108 Tare
Price labeling mode, 7 - 101 Fixed value memory, 7 - 108
Print menu settings, 7 - 163 PLU tare, 7 - 44
Printer, 7 - 165 print on label, 7 - 123
Quick service mode, 7 - 100 print on ticket, 7 - 113
Quick-service mode, 7 - 100 Tare %, 7 - 52
Scale number, 7 - 140 Tare
Scrolling message, 7 - 93 Batch tare, 6 - 20
Sensitivity, 7 - 155 clear, 6 - 22
Subnet mask, 7 - 138 Manual tare, 6 - 21
Switching operating mode, 7 - 89 Operator tare, 6 - 23, 6 - 24
TCP-IP , 7 - 137 unknown tare, 6 - 19
Time, 7 - 85
Year with 2, 4 digits, 7 - 85 Tare functions, 6 - 19
PLU tare, 6 - 22
Side cover , 5 - 8
6.111.98.5.01.18 11 - 7
Tare fixed value memory 1 - 4, 6 - 22 Ticket design, Overview, 7 - 111

Test printing, 7 - 161 Ticket journal, Call-up data volume,
Text 7 - 136
Alternative text for packed-on date, Time, set, 7 - 85
7 - 130 Total, 6 - 14
Alternative text for use-by date, Rounding of article total, 7 - 109
7 - 130 Rounding of customer total, 7 - 109
Article supplement. text, 7 - 48 Total label, 7 - 88
Create header and footer text, 7 - 56
delete, 7 - 59 Total sales report, 7 - 82
Function keys, 7 - 14 delete, 7 - 83
Input, 7 - 10 display, 7 - 83
Input PLU text, 7 - 47 Traceability data, 6 - 46
print
Traceability marker, 7 - 32
Header and footer text, 7 - 5, 7 - 58
Manual input, 7 - 32
Supplementary texts, 7 - 6
Print out overview, 7 - 58
Scrolling message, 7 - 57 U
Supplementary text, 7 - 55
Unit price input, 6 - 10
Thermal bar, Cleaning, 9 - 2
11 via 10-key keypad, 6 - 10
Thermal paper storage, 9 - 6
Use-by date, Alternative text, 7 - 130
Thermal strip, close, 5 - 10
Ticket
Assisted sales, 6 - 25 V
Change font, 7 - 115 VAT
Configuration, 7 - 112 administer, 7 - 72
Number of article text lines, 7 - 115 Allocate to PLU, 7 - 51
Open ticket again, 6 - 27, 6 - 28, Define VAT rate, 7 - 73
7 - 98 For all articles, 7 - 74
open tickets, 7 - 91 for non-PLU minus, 7 - 70
print upon request, 6 - 26 for non-PLU non-weighed, 7 - 70
Printing foreign currency, 7 - 116 for non-PLU weighed, 7 - 70
Printout cancellation, 7 - 99 inclusive or exclusive, 7 - 73
Printout of VAT incl., 7 - 99 List, 7 - 9
Printout, as required, 7 - 99 manage, 7 - 74
Release printing of: Overview, 7 - 37
Amount paid in/out, 7 - 116 overwriteable, 7 - 51
Barcode, 7 - 112 Print list, 7 - 74
footer text, 7 - 113 Text , 7 - 73
Foreign currency supplementary text,
7 - 114 Verbund, Installation, 4 - 5
Header text, 7 - 113 Verification information, 2 - 3
Rounding suppl. text, 7 - 114
Supplementary article text, 7 - 116
Tare, 7 - 113 W
Repeat ticket, 6 - 27, 7 - 98
Waagenverbund, Installation, 4 - 5
Set barcode height, 7 - 112
Ticket counter, 7 - 115 Weight class, 7 - 47
11 - 8 6.111.98.5.01.18
Weight input, Manual, 6 - 18 Z

WLAN
Functional diagnosis, 7 - 154 Zero setting, 7 - 90
on/off, 7 - 151 Zerosetting, 6 - 1
Settings, 7 - 152, 7 - 153
Switch on, 7 - 152
Y
Year , 2 or 4-digit, 7 - 85
11
6.111.98.5.01.18 11 - 9
Operating instruction BC II Appendix
Appendix
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll
Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
Appendix Operating instruction BC II
6.111.98.5.01.18
Hauptverwaltung Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen
Wilhelm-Kraut-Straße 65
72336 Balingen, Germany
Declaration of type conformity

We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described
below
Definition: retail scale
Type: BC II . . . (100, 200, 800)
No. of EC type approval certificate: D07-09-014
No. of notified body for EC type approval
certificate: 0102 (PTB)
complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current
requirements of the following EC directives:
Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments 2009/23/EC
EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC
Directive on electrical equipment designed for use 2006/95/EC
within certain voltage limits
Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology: DIN EN 45501: 1992 (OIML R76-1, 2006)
EMC: DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 55022/2011-12
DIN EN 61000-3-2/2010-03; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06
Safety: DIN EN 60950-1
This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic

weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type
conformity of a notified body.
This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.
The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba

order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the
prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.
Date: September 27th, 2012

Signature of manufacturer: ppa.
Title: Andreas W. Kraut
Chairman of the Executive Board
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) & Shareholder
6.111.98.5.01.18
Hauptverwaltung Balingen
Postfach 10 01 64, 72301 Balingen
Wilhelm-Kraut-Straße 65
72336 Balingen, Germany
Declaration of type conformity

We declare herewith that the type of the non-automatic weighing instrument described
below
Definition: retail scale
Type: BC II . . . (100, 200, 800)
with WLAN
No. of EC type approval certificate: D07-09-014
No. of notified body for EC type approval
certificate: 0102 (PTB)
complies with the type described in the type approval certificate and the current
requirements of the following EC directives:
Directive on non-automatic weighing instruments 2009/23/EC
EMC directive on electromagnetic compatibility 2004/108/EC
Directive on electrical equipment designed for use 2006/95/EC
within certain voltage limits
Applied national technical standards and specifications:

Metrology: DIN EN 45501: 1992 (OIML R76-1, 2006)
EMC: DIN EN 61000-6-1/2007-10; DIN EN 55022/2011-12
DIN EN 61000-3-2/2010-03; DIN EN 61000-3-3/2009-06
Safety: DIN EN 60950-1
WLAN: See data in declaration of conformity of manufacturer.
This declaration of type conformity refers to the EC directive for non-automatic

weighing instruments and is only valid in conjunction with a certificate of type
conformity of a notified body.
This sentence can be omitted, if conformity evaluation is done by Bizerba.
The declaration of type conformity is based on contractual documents (Bizerba

order documents). Any modification made to the above device type without the
prior permission of Bizerba or by Bizerba staff will render thisdeclaration invalid.
Date: September 27th, 2012

Signature of manufacturer: ppa.
Title: Andreas W. Kraut
Chairman of the Executive Board
Chief Executive Officer (CEO) & Shareholder
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18
SparkLAN WUBR-507N
6.111.98.5.01.18

Bizerba Tare Machine Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizerba Tare Machine Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Retail scale BC II

Translation of original operating instructions 6.111.98.5.01.18

List of contents Page

1 About these instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1

5 Device and operating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

6.11 Operating processes for programmed articles (PLU) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15

General programming sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

7.15 Article maintenance menu Pr 1-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 42

7.16.8 Non-PLU settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr215 . 7 - 67

7.18 Configuration menu Pr 5-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 84

7.18.10 PLU input mode and range limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr535 . 7 - 103

7.20 Label design - overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 118

7.21 Commissioning menu Pr 6-- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 137

7.21.15 Keyboard selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pr631 . 7 - 158

Declaration of Conformity for BC ll with WLAN

1.2 Target group

Mod Key symbols prompt you to press this key on

<Key> Text within < > describes a key.

”Display” Text within ” ” indicates the display text.

2.4 Designation label

Fig. 4: Explanations of the individual labels:

Explanations of the individual labels:

Device must not be disposed of in domestic waste. Return to

2.5 Verification information

Verification information for non-EU countries

2.6 Standards and guidelines

2.7 Operating conditions

- Temperature and air humidity:

2.7.1 Power supply

Interference suppression measures

2.9 Disposal of devices/environmental protection

3.1 Requirements on the operating personnel

3.2 Device signs

Remove the mains plug from the socket

Fig. 5: Remove the mains plug from the socket

3.3 Sources of risk related to the system

- Remove the AC power plug to disconnect from the mains.

4.2.1 Conditions for the place of installation

4.2.2 Assemble the device

1 Position the spirit level

Turn the foot screws 2 until the air 1

4.2.4 Check the electric connection

Installation of customer's power supply

4.2.5 Cable connections

1 EDP (scale network)

Fig. 9: BC II 100 / 200

1 EDP (scale network)

Fig. 10: BC II 800

Example of scale network

Scale1 1 Scale 2 1 Scale 3 1 Scale 4 1 Scale 5 1 Scale 6 1

1 Connection scale (EDP, scale network)

4.2.6 Rechargeable battery

Operation with rechargeable batteries

Battery icon display

kg EURO per EUR

Fig. 11: Display

When connected to the mains:

When battery operated:

Switch device on/off, see page 6 - 1.

5 Device and operating controls

5.1 Main switch

kg EURO per EUR

Fig. 13: Dot 7 display